WO2024152274A1 - Method and apparatus for determining uplink antenna switching mode, and storage medium - Google Patents
Method and apparatus for determining uplink antenna switching mode, and storage medium Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024152274A1 WO2024152274A1 PCT/CN2023/072998 CN2023072998W WO2024152274A1 WO 2024152274 A1 WO2024152274 A1 WO 2024152274A1 CN 2023072998 W CN2023072998 W CN 2023072998W WO 2024152274 A1 WO2024152274 A1 WO 2024152274A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- symbol
- control information
- downlink control
- uplink
- frequency band
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 150
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 34
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 29
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 13
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 6
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 abstract description 17
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 29
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 17
- 101150077548 DCI1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013475 authorization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
- H04W72/232—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the physical layer, e.g. DCI signalling
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a method, device and storage medium for determining an uplink antenna switching mode.
- the number of frequency bands supported by the terminal during uplink transmission is expanded from 2 to 3 or 4.
- a switching gap is set.
- the terminal can complete the switching of the uplink antenna between different frequency bands within the switching gap.
- the present disclosure provides a method, an apparatus and a storage medium for determining an uplink antenna switching mode.
- a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode is provided, the method being executed by a user equipment, including:
- the uplink antenna switching mode is determined according to the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information.
- a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode including:
- a receiving module used to receive downlink control information sent by a network device, wherein the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching;
- the processing module is used to determine the uplink antenna switching mode according to the multiple uplink services and/or the downlink control information.
- a user equipment including:
- a memory for storing processor-executable instructions
- the processor is configured to implement the steps of the method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode provided in the first aspect of the embodiment of the present disclosure when executing the executable instructions.
- a computer-readable storage medium on which computer program instructions are stored, wherein the program instructions, when executed by a processor, implement the steps of the method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode provided in the first aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- It can receive at least one downlink control information sent by a network device, and determine the uplink antenna switching mode based on the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information, which clarifies the conditions under which the uplink antenna switching mode occurs to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
- Fig. 1 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing how uplink services or downlink control information are carried on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 15 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 16 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 25 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 34 is a block diagram showing a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- Fig. 35 is a block diagram showing a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- plural refers to two or more than two, and other quantifiers are similar thereto.
- “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, A and/or B may represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
- the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
- the singular forms “a”, “the” and “the” are also intended to include plural forms, unless the context clearly indicates other meanings.
- first”, “second”, etc. are used to describe various information, but such information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other, and do not indicate a specific order or degree of importance.
- the expressions “first”, “second”, etc. can be used interchangeably.
- the expressions of the first switching mode and the second switching mode proposed in the present disclosure can be used interchangeably.
- the terminal has a limited number of radio frequency (RF) chains for processing and receiving/transmitting signals.
- RF radio frequency
- the terminal can have two RF links, and the two RF links can be two transmit (Tx) links, two receive (Rx) links, and two transmit links/receive links.
- multiple uplink antennas can share one RF link, and one uplink antenna is usually on one frequency band at the same time.
- Uplink antenna switching (UL Tx switching).
- DCI downlink control information
- the terminal needs to switch the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where multiple uplink services are located.
- This process can be called uplink antenna switching.
- version 18 supports switching between two uplink antennas through the following multiple schemes:
- Solution 1 Before the terminal switches, the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B respectively. After the terminal switches, the two antennas are in band C and band D respectively. At this time, the terminal has two implementation methods: Method 1: One of the uplink antennas switches from band A to band C, and the other uplink antenna switches from band B to band D. At this time, the switching gap is determined by N ⁇ A-C ⁇ and N ⁇ B-D ⁇ ; Method 2: One of the uplink antennas switches from band B to band C, and the other uplink antenna switches from band A to band D. At this time, the switching gap is determined by N ⁇ B-C ⁇ and N ⁇ A-D ⁇ .
- Solution 2 Before the terminal switches, the two uplink antennas are on band A. After the terminal switches, the two antennas are on band C and band D respectively. At this time, N ⁇ A-C ⁇ and N ⁇ A-D ⁇ determine the switching gap.
- Solution 3 Before the terminal switches, the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B respectively. After the terminal switches, the two antennas are in band C. At this time, the switching gap is determined by N ⁇ A-C ⁇ and N ⁇ B-C ⁇ .
- Sub-Carrier Space There are multiple sub-carriers in the carrier signal, and the interval between each sub-carrier is the sub-carrier spacing.
- An uplink service or a downlink control message is usually transmitted on a frequency band at the same time.
- a frequency band corresponds to a fixed type of sub-carrier spacing. For example, the sub-carrier spacing of band A is 15KHz, the sub-carrier spacing of band B is 30KHz, and so on.
- the switching gap can also be called the switching time or switching period.
- the terminal switches the uplink antenna from one frequency band to another, there is a switching gap.
- the terminal can perform a switching operation on the uplink antenna, and during the switching gap, the base station will not schedule uplink transmission in the frequency band before the uplink antenna is switched and the frequency band after the uplink antenna is switched.
- Downlink Control Information is transmitted on the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). It is control information related to the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
- the downlink control information includes resource block allocation information, modulation method and other related content.
- the terminal needs to perform uplink antenna switching to switch the multiple uplink antennas from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located.
- the switching mode of the multiple uplink antennas may be that the multiple uplink antennas are switched simultaneously, or the multiple uplink antennas are switched separately.
- FIG. 2 shows an example of simultaneous switching of two uplink antennas.
- DCI1 and DCI0 are located on band A and band B respectively
- uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D respectively.
- the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both located at T 0 , that is, the two uplink services start at the same time
- N1 is the switching gap required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C
- N2 is the switching gap for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D.
- the time N1 and N2 for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna on the two sets of frequency band pairs are consistent, so the mode of uplink antenna switching performed by the terminal is simultaneous switching, which is regarded as the uplink antenna switching of the two sets of frequency band pairs as one time.
- FIG. 3 Please refer to FIG. 3 for another example of simultaneous switching of two uplink antennas.
- the difference from FIG. 3 is that the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are different.
- the starting position of PUSCH1 is T 0,2 and the starting position of PUSCH0 is T 0,1 , that is, the two uplink services do not start at the same time.
- the switching gap between the two is The maximum value is selected from N1 and N2, that is, based on PUSCH1, N1 is used as the switching gap for uplink antenna switching of two frequency band pairs, so the uplink antennas of these two frequency band pairs are switched once.
- FIG. 4 shows an example of two uplink antennas being switched separately.
- the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both located at T 0 .
- the times N1 and N2 at which the terminal performs uplink antenna switching on the two frequency band pairs are different, so the uplink antenna switching mode performed by the terminal is switching separately, and the number of uplink antenna switching times for the two frequency band pairs is regarded as multiple times, and the switching of the uplink antenna on each frequency band pair is an independent switching.
- Figure 5 shows another example of switching two uplink antennas separately.
- the difference between Figure 5 and Figure 4 is that the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are different.
- the starting position of PUSCH1 is T 0,2
- the starting position of PUSCH0 is T 0,1 .
- the switching gap N2 of PUSCH1 is based on the starting position T 0,2 of PUSCH1
- the switching gap N1 of PUSCH0 is based on the starting position T 0,1 of PUSCH0. Therefore, the switching gaps N1 and N2 for the terminal to switch the uplink antennas on the two sets of frequency band pairs are also different and independent.
- the terminal's uplink antenna switching mode has at least two different modes, such as one switching and multiple switching, it is necessary to clarify the conditions for the uplink antenna switching mode to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
- FIG. 1 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S101 at least one downlink control information sent by a network device is received, where the downlink control information is used to schedule a plurality of uplink services for uplink antenna switching.
- the user equipment proposed in any embodiment of the present disclosure can be a mobile phone, a tablet, a portable computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality (VR)) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control (industrial control), a wireless terminal in a smart grid (smart grid), a wireless terminal in transportation safety (transportation safety), a wireless terminal in a smart city (smart city), a wireless terminal in a smart home (smart home), etc.
- VR virtual reality
- AR augmented reality
- the user equipment may sometimes also be referred to as a terminal device, a terminal, an access terminal, a UE unit, a UE station, a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile station (mobile station), a mobile client, etc.
- a terminal an access terminal
- a UE unit a UE station
- a mobile device a mobile station
- a mobile station a mobile station (mobile station)
- a mobile client a mobile client
- uplink communication and downlink communication will be carried out between the terminal and the base station.
- the uplink communication and downlink communication require transmission resources. If the terminal needs to send data to the base station, the terminal will request uplink resources from the base station.
- the base station configures the uplink resources in the downlink control information. After the terminal receives the downlink control information, it uses the uplink resources in the downlink control information to schedule the uplink service, and the terminal then sends the uplink service data to the base station through the uplink.
- the user equipment will receive at least one downlink control information sent by the network equipment, and the at least one downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services of the user equipment.
- the frequency band where the at least one downlink control information is located is different from the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located, it is necessary to switch the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located.
- the uplink antenna needs to be switched from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located.
- the frequency band where the multiple downlink control information is located is different from the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located, it is necessary to switch the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the multiple downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located.
- step S102 the uplink antenna switching mode is determined according to the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information.
- the uplink antenna switching modes triggered by multiple uplink services include a first switching mode and a second switching mode.
- the first switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch once, multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment are regarded as one, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on a switching gap, the frequency band pair for which the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching shares a switching gap, and multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment share a switching gap.
- the second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for which the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
- the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is the frequency band before the uplink antenna switching
- the frequency band where the uplink service is located is the frequency band after the uplink antenna switching
- both are related to the uplink antenna switching. Therefore, based on the downlink control information and at least one of the multiple uplink services, it is possible to determine whether the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is the first switching mode or the second switching mode.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services may be determined according to the multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching.
- the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services may be determined according to the downlink control information for scheduling the multiple uplink services.
- the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by multiple uplink services may be determined according to multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching and downlink control information for scheduling the multiple uplink services.
- At least one downlink control information sent by a network device can be received, and the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching; based on the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information, the uplink antenna switching mode is determined, which clarifies the conditions under which the uplink antenna switching mode occurs, so as to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
- FIG. 11 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment, the method being executed by a user equipment, comprising the following steps:
- step S201 it is determined that the downlink control information and the multiple uplink services are located in different frequency bands.
- the downlink control information sent by the network device when the downlink control information sent by the network device is located in the same frequency band as the multiple uplink services scheduled by the network device, it is determined that the multiple uplink services do not need to perform uplink antenna switching; when the downlink control information sent by the network device is located in different frequency bands than the multiple uplink services scheduled by the network device, it is determined that the multiple uplink services need to perform uplink antenna switching to adapt to data reception and transmission on the new frequency band.
- the initial states of the two uplink antennas are both in band A, and the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are respectively in band B and band C. That is, the terminal receives the scheduling information of the base station in band A and needs to send uplink services on band B and/or band C.
- the initial states of the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B
- the antenna states after switching are in band C and band D
- the terminal receives the scheduling information sent by the base station in band A and/or band B, and needs to send uplink services on band C and/or band D.
- the initial states of the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B
- the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are both in band C, that is, the terminal receives the scheduling information sent by the base station in band A and/or band B, and needs to send uplink services on band C.
- the initial state refers to the state before the uplink antenna is switched, that is, the frequency band where the downlink control information is located;
- the antenna state refers to the state after the uplink antenna is switched, that is, the frequency band where the uplink service is located.
- the frequency bands where multiple downlink control information are located can be the same frequency band or different frequency bands, and the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located can be the same frequency band or different frequency bands.
- step S202 it is determined that the multiple uplink services require uplink antenna switching.
- the uplink antenna switching mode can be determined based on multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined, which clarifies the conditions under which the uplink antenna switching mode occurs, so as to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
- FIG. 12 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S301 it is determined that the multiple uplink services start simultaneously.
- the simultaneous start of multiple uplink services includes at least one of the following:
- the number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
- step S302 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- the first switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch once, multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment are regarded as one, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on a switching gap, the frequency band pair for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching shares a switching gap, and multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment share a switching gap.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services is determined as the first switching mode, on the one hand, it will cause the base station to be unable to schedule uplink transmission on some frequency bands in a timely manner; on the other hand, it places high requirements on terminal capabilities; on the third hand, the protocol needs to define reference points for multiple uplink antennas to share switching gaps, which is more complicated for the protocol.
- the switching gap required for the band A and band C frequency band pair is longer than that required for the band B and band D frequency band pair.
- the switching gap for the uplink antenna switching is determined to be N1
- the switching of the two uplink antennas is performed according to N1, which results in the switching gap N1 of the uplink antenna on the band B and band D frequency band pair being increased compared to the actually required switching gap N2.
- the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on band B and band D.
- the present disclosure proposes that when multiple uplink services requiring uplink antenna switching start at the same time, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode.
- DCI1 and DCI0 are located on band A and band B respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D respectively, and the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both located at T 0 , that is, the two uplink services start at the same time
- N1 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C
- N2 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D.
- the switching gaps N1 and N2 actually required for the two frequency band pairs are the same.
- the switching gap for uplink antenna switching is determined to be N1 or N2
- the two frequency band pairs will release band A, band B, band C and band D at the same time after the switching gap N1 or N2, and there will be no situation where the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on some frequency bands in a timely manner.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode.
- the present disclosure determines the switching mode of the uplink antenna as the first switching mode when multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching start at the same time, rather than determining the switching mode of the uplink antenna as the first switching mode when multiple uplink services do not start at the same time, the switching gaps actually required by multiple uplink antennas are consistent, and multiple uplink antennas are switched based on the consistent switching gaps, which can also avoid the situation where the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission in some frequency bands in a timely manner.
- the terminal only needs to determine one switching gap, and its determination logic is relatively simple, and the requirements for the terminal are relatively low.
- the protocol does not need to define reference points for switching multiple uplink antennas, which reduces the complexity of the protocol.
- FIG. 13 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S401 the first symbol alignment of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services is determined.
- the alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services may be regarded as the multiple uplink services starting simultaneously.
- the symbol may be an OFDM symbol in a time-frequency resource concentration, and the channel carrying multiple uplink services is a transmission resource.
- the terminal may use the transmission resource to send data of the uplink service to the base station to realize uplink transmission.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services proposed in any embodiment of the present disclosure is the first symbol of the physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) occupied by the uplink services.
- Physical Uplink Shared Channel Physical Uplink Shared Channel
- the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain and is regarded as being aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service overlaps with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain.
- the first symbol of the channel considered to carry the multiple uplink services is aligned.
- the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services overlap in the time domain, including at least one of the following (1) and (2):
- step S402 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- step S402 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the first switching mode.
- FIG. 14 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S501 the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where two uplink services are located are different, and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain.
- the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, which is regarded as the alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services.
- the symbol lengths of the channels on the frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings are different.
- the larger the subcarrier spacing the shorter the length of the corresponding channel symbol. For example, when the subcarrier spacing is 15Khz, the symbol length is 66.7us, and when the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz, the symbol length is 33.3us, etc.
- the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, including at least one of the following (3), (4), (5), and (6).
- the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is referred to as symbol A
- the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing is referred to as symbol B.
- Symbol A and symbol B are only a description method for the convenience of readers, and are not used as a limitation on the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing, although the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing differs from the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing by a symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing, the two can also be regarded as aligned.
- step S502 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- step S502 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
- the switching mode is the first switching mode.
- FIG. 15 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment, the method being executed by a user equipment, comprising the following steps:
- step S601 it is determined that a first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, which can be regarded as the alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, including at least one of the following (7), (8), (9), and (10), the following multiple uplink services are data sent from different frequency bands arranged in sequence, and the first uplink service can be sent from the terminal before the last uplink service.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service overlaps with the symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, it can be considered that the first symbol of the channel carrying the uplink service between the first uplink service and the last uplink service is also aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service and the symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
- a left edge of a first symbol of a channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with a left edge of a first symbol of a channel carrying the last uplink service.
- the second uplink service and the third uplink service are sent from the terminal in sequence, when the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service, then the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
- the second uplink service and the third uplink service are sent from the terminal in sequence, when the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service, then the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
- the second uplink service and the third uplink service are sent from the terminal in sequence, when the left edge of the first symbol of the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service, then the left edge or right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
- a plurality of uplink services including a first uplink service (the first uplink service), a second uplink service and a third uplink service (the last uplink service) are sent from a terminal in sequence.
- the right edge is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service
- the left edge or right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services can be aligned.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services it can be regarded as that multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching start at the same time.
- step S602 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- step S602 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
- the uplink antenna switching mode can be determined as the first switching mode, so that the terminal determines that the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services is the first switching mode.
- FIG. 16 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S701 it is determined that the number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
- the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value, it is considered that multiple uplink services can start simultaneously.
- the predetermined value is a threshold value of the number of symbols between the first symbol of a channel on a set reference frequency band and the first symbol of channels on other frequency bands.
- the predetermined value N is predefined by the standard, or configured by the base station to the terminal, or reported by the terminal to the base station.
- the value of N can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7..., and the present disclosure does not limit this.
- the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services can be aligned.
- the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services are aligned, it can be regarded that multiple uplink services requiring uplink antenna switching start at the same time; in the case of other terminal capabilities, there is no need to align the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services.
- the number of symbols between the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value, it can also be regarded as that multiple uplink services requiring uplink antenna switching start at the same time.
- Figure 10 taking the number of multiple uplink services as two as an example, when the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located is different, the first symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band and the first symbol of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band are separated by one symbol of the uplink service on the 15KHz frequency band, or are separated by two symbols of the uplink service on the 30KHz frequency band. In this case, although there is a certain number of symbols between the two symbols, it is also considered that the two uplink services start at the same time.
- the reference frequency band can have different types of subcarrier spacing such as 15KHz, 30KHz, 60KHz, 120KHz, 240KHz, etc.
- the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services should be determined according to the reference frequency band, that is, the number of symbols between the first symbol of the channel on the reference frequency band and the first symbol of the channels on the remaining frequency bands should be determined according to the reference frequency band.
- the reference frequency band is defined by the standard, or configured by the base station to the terminal, or reported by the terminal to the base station.
- the reference frequency band is the frequency band with the maximum subcarrier spacing (the frequency band of 30KHz)
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band and the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band are separated by two symbols of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band.
- FIG10 is only an example.
- the reference frequency band is the frequency band with a subcarrier spacing of 30KHz
- the number of symbols between the left edges of the two first symbols should be at least two.
- the predetermined value N can also be set with the frequency band with the maximum subcarrier spacing as a reference.
- the reference frequency band is a frequency band with the minimum subcarrier spacing (a frequency band of 15KHz)
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band and the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band are separated by one symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band.
- FIG10 is only an example.
- the reference frequency band is a frequency band with a subcarrier spacing of 15KHz
- the number of symbols between the left edges of the two first symbols should be at least one.
- the predetermined value N can also be set with the frequency band with the minimum subcarrier spacing as a reference.
- the frequency band corresponding to the maximum subcarrier spacing mentioned above can also be called when there are only two frequency bands in all frequency bands.
- the frequency band corresponding to the minimum subcarrier spacing mentioned above can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the small subcarrier spacing when there are only two frequency bands.
- the reference frequency band may also be set to the frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point.
- the frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point may also be referred to as the frequency band corresponding to the higher frequency point.
- the reference frequency band may also be set to the frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point.
- the frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point may also be referred to as the frequency band corresponding to the lower frequency point.
- step S702 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode.
- step S702 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
- FIG. 17 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S801 it is determined that the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are aligned, and the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
- determining that the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are aligned and the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value can be regarded as the simultaneous start of multiple uplink services.
- the alignment of the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services can refer to the above-mentioned step S401, which will not be repeated here; the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to the predetermined value, which can refer to the above-mentioned step S701, which will not be repeated here.
- step S802 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- step S802 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
- FIG. 18 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S901 it is determined that a plurality of uplink services are not started at the same time.
- the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned
- the number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
- step S902 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- the second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for the multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
- the terminal when multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching start at the same time, if the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined as the second switching mode, the terminal will need to determine multiple switching gaps, while if multiple uplink services start at the same time, only one switching gap needs to be determined. The determination of multiple switching gaps will result in a waste of terminal computing resources.
- DCI1 and DCI0 are located on band A and band B respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D respectively, and the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both are T 0 , and the two uplink services start at the same time, N1 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C, and N2 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D.
- the switching gaps actually required for the uplink antennas on the two frequency band pairs are the same.
- the switching mode is determined to be the second switching mode, two switching gaps are used to switch the two uplink antennas respectively.
- the amount of data calculated is small, which does not match the computing resources allocated by the terminal, which undoubtedly occupies excess computing resources of the terminal.
- the present disclosure proposes that when multiple uplink services for which uplink antenna switching is to be performed do not start at the same time, the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode.
- DCI1 and DCI0 in Figure 5 are located on band A and band B, respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D, respectively, and the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are different, the starting position of PUSCH1 is T 0,2 , and the starting position of PUSCH0 is T 0,1 , that is, the two uplink services do not start at the same time, N1 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C, and N2 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D.
- the switching gap actually required for the uplink antenna on the band A and band C frequency pair is N1
- the switching gap actually required for the band B and band D frequency pair is N2.
- the switching gaps actually required for the two are different.
- the switching mode is determined to be the second switching mode, and two switching gaps are used to switch the two uplink antennas respectively.
- the amount of data calculated is larger, which can match the computing resources allocated by the terminal, so that the computing resources of the terminal are fully utilized and there is no waste of computing resources.
- the switching gap between the uplink antenna on the band A and band C frequency pair does not affect the switching gap between the uplink antenna on the band B and band D frequency pair.
- the two are independent of each other. After the switching gap N2 between the band B and band D frequency pair, the base station can immediately schedule band B and band D without having to wait until N1 to schedule band B and band D.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode.
- the computing resources of the terminal can be matched with the calculated data, and the computing resources of the terminal can be fully utilized without wasting computing resources;
- multiple switching gaps are used to switch multiple uplink antennas respectively, which also makes the switching processes of multiple uplink antennas independent of each other, and the base station can schedule the released frequency band in time.
- FIG. 19 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1001 it is determined that the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned, and/or the number of intervals between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
- Determining that the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned and/or the number of intervals between the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value can be regarded as that the multiple uplink services do not start at the same time.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services is not aligned, including at least one of the following:
- the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, and is regarded as the first symbol of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services is not aligned.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, which can be regarded as the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned.
- the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services do not overlap in the time domain, including at least one of the following (1) and (2):
- the predetermined value is a threshold value of the number of symbols spaced between the first symbol of the channel on the reference frequency band and the first symbol of the channel on the remaining frequency bands.
- the predetermined value N is predefined by a standard, or configured by a base station to a terminal, or reported by a terminal to a base station.
- the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services is defined according to a reference frequency band.
- the reference frequency point is either defined by a standard, or configured by a base station to a terminal, or reported by a terminal to a base station.
- the reference frequency band may be a frequency band corresponding to the maximum subcarrier spacing, or a frequency band corresponding to the minimum subcarrier spacing, or a frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point, or a frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point.
- the frequency band corresponding to the maximum subcarrier spacing is When there are only two frequency bands, it can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the large subcarrier spacing. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the minimum subcarrier spacing can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the small subcarrier spacing. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the higher frequency point. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the lower frequency point.
- step S1002 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- the second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for the multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
- step S1002 refers to the above-mentioned step S902 and will not be repeated here.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the second switching mode when at least one of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned and the number of intervals between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
- FIG. 20 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1101 it is determined that a first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services does not overlap with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
- the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, including at least one of the following:
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing;
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing;
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing;
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing.
- step S1102 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- step S1002 refers to the above-mentioned step S902 and will not be repeated here.
- the switching mode is the second switching mode.
- FIG. 21 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1201 it is determined that a first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services does not overlap with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service among the multiple uplink services does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, including at least one of the following:
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
- step S1202 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is performed by a user equipment Execution, including the following steps:
- step S1301 it is determined whether multiple downlink control information are aligned.
- the aligning of multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services includes at least one of the following (13, (14), and (15):
- the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information
- a first symbol of a channel carrying first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying last downlink control information.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing
- the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information, wherein the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information proposed in any embodiment of the present disclosure may be the first symbol or the last symbol of the physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) occupied by the downlink control information.
- PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
- step S1302 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- the first switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch once, multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment are regarded as one, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on a switching gap, the frequency band pair for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching shares a switching gap, and multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment share a switching gap.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode.
- the present disclosure determines the uplink antenna switching mode as the first switching mode when there are multiple downlink control information, rather than determining the uplink antenna switching mode as the first switching mode when multiple downlink control information are not aligned, the switching gaps actually required for multiple uplink antennas are consistent, and multiple uplink antennas are switched based on consistent switching gaps, which can also avoid the situation where the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission in some frequency bands in a timely manner.
- the terminal only needs to determine one switching gap, and its determination logic is relatively simple, and the requirements for the terminal are relatively low.
- the protocol does not need to define reference points for switching multiple uplink antennas, which reduces the complexity of the protocol.
- FIG. 23 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1401 it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where two or more pieces of downlink control information are located are the same, and at least one of the following situations exists:
- the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information
- a first symbol of a channel carrying first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying last downlink control information.
- the above four situations can all be regarded as alignment of multiple downlink control information.
- the first symbol alignment of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information includes at least one of (16) and (17):
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the last symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned, including at least one of (18) and (19):
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last time domain symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol carrying the last downlink control information.
- the last symbol of the first downlink control information in the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the last downlink control information, including at least one of (20), (21), (22), and (23):
- the first symbol of the first downlink control information in the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned with the last symbol of the last downlink control information, including at least one of (24), (25), (26), and (27):
- step S1402 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- step S302 Please refer to the above step S302 for this step, which will not be described again here.
- the subcarrier spacing of the frequency band where multiple downlink control information are located is the same, if there is at least one of the following: the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned; the last symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned; the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information; the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information, it is determined that the multiple downlink control information scheduling the multiple uplink services are aligned, and at this time, it can be determined that the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is the first switching mode.
- FIG. 24 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1501 it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two downlink control information are located are different, and the frequency band with the smaller subcarrier spacing has the smaller subcarrier spacing.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing; the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, which can be regarded as alignment of multiple downlink control information.
- the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing
- the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- step S1502 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- step S1602 refers to the above-mentioned step S302 and will not be repeated here.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
- FIG. 25 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1601 it is determined that the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information overlaps with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information overlaps with the fourth symbol carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain, which can be regarded as alignment of multiple downlink control signaling.
- the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information
- the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left side of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- step S1602 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- step S902 for step S1602, which will not be repeated here.
- the switching mode can be determined to be the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
- FIG. 26 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1701 it is determined that a plurality of downlink control information are not aligned.
- the multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services are not aligned, including at least one of (36), (37), and (38):
- the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned
- the last symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned
- the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information
- a first symbol of a channel carrying a first downlink control information among a plurality of downlink control information is not aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying a last downlink control information.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing in the time domain.
- the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing
- the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information
- the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- step S1702 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- the second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for the multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
- step S902 for step S1702, which will not be repeated here.
- the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode.
- the computing resources of the terminal can be matched with the calculated data, and the computing resources of the terminal can be fully utilized without wasting computing resources;
- multiple switching gaps are used to switch multiple uplink antennas respectively, which also makes the switching processes of multiple uplink antennas independent of each other, and the base station can schedule the released frequency band in time.
- FIG. 27 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1801 it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where two or more pieces of downlink control information are located are the same, and at least one of the following situations exists:
- the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned
- the last symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned
- the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information
- a first symbol of a channel carrying a first downlink control information among a plurality of downlink control information is not aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying a last downlink control information.
- the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple downlink control information are not aligned, including at least one of (39) and (40):
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the last symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned, including at least one of (41) and (42):
- the last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last time domain symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol carrying the last downlink control information.
- the last symbol of the first downlink control information in the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the first symbol of the last downlink control information, including at least one of (43), (44), (45), and (46):
- a first symbol of a first downlink control information in a channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned with a last symbol of a last downlink control information, including at least one of (47), (48), (49), and (50):
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- step S1802 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- step S902 Please refer to the above step S902 for this step, which will not be described again here.
- the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode.
- the computing resources of the terminal can be matched with the calculated data, and the computing resources of the terminal can be fully utilized without wasting computing resources;
- multiple switching gaps are used to switch multiple uplink antennas respectively, which also makes the switching processes of multiple uplink antennas independent of each other, and the base station can schedule the released frequency band in time.
- FIG. 28 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is performed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S1901 it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two downlink control information are located are different, and the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the second symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain; the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing and the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing do not overlap in the time domain, which can be regarded as multiple downlink control information are not aligned.
- the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing
- the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
- step S1902 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- step S1902 refers to the above step S902 and will not be repeated here.
- the subcarrier spacing of the two frequency bands where the downlink control information is located is different, and the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is different from the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the second symbols do not overlap in the time domain, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is the second switching mode.
- FIG. 29 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S2001 it is determined that the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain, which can be regarded as the multiple downlink control signalings are not aligned.
- the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information
- the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
- step S2002 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- step S2002 can refer to the above-mentioned step S902 and will not be repeated here.
- the switching mode can be determined to be the second switching mode when the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
- FIG30 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S2101 it is determined that the downlink control information of the multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information.
- step S2102 it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- the mode of switching multiple uplink antennas can be determined to be the first switching mode.
- one downlink control information can schedule multiple uplink services. Therefore, when the downlink control information scheduling multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information, it can be determined that the uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is the first switching mode.
- the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink and downlink services can be determined to be the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the switching mode of the uplink antenna.
- FIG. 31 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S2201 during the process of switching the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on the target frequency band, and the target frequency band is a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the uplink service is located, and/or a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the downlink control information is located.
- the standard supports configuring related frequency bands for each frequency band, and the frequency band supports concurrency with related frequency bands.
- the frequency band When the frequency band is in a switching state, although the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on the frequency band, it can schedule uplink transmission on the related frequency band; of course, the frequency band can also be not configured with related frequency bands, and does not support concurrency with any frequency band.
- the base station When the frequency band is in a switching state, the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on the frequency band, nor can it schedule uplink transmission on any frequency band.
- the target frequency band is any frequency band; when the frequency band does not support concurrency with some frequency bands, the target frequency band is some frequency bands.
- band C is not concurrent with any frequency band or band C is not configured with any related frequency bands, and the two uplink antennas are on Band A and band B respectively before switching, and are on band C after switching, the terminal does not expect the base station to perform uplink transmission scheduling on band D.
- band A, band B, and band C are in the switching state, the terminal does not expect the base station to schedule uplink transmission on band A, band B, and band C to avoid errors in the process of uplink antenna switching between different frequency bands.
- the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on the target frequency band.
- FIG. 32 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
- step S2301 when the uplink antenna switches from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band, wherein the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is not concurrent with any frequency band.
- the terminal does not expect the network device to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band.
- the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band.
- FIG. 33 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a network device and includes the following steps:
- step S2401 when a network device has multiple switching gaps, it is determined that the network device is switched according to the maximum switching gap.
- the switching gap may also be called a switching path. If the base station assumes that the terminal switches according to the minimum switching gap, the base station may start scheduling the uplink service of the terminal, but the uplink service of the terminal has not yet been switched to the frequency band where the uplink service should be located.
- the initial states of the two uplink antennas are band A and band B
- the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are band C and band D respectively.
- the switching gap required for one uplink antenna to switch from band A to band C is N1
- the switching gap required for the other uplink antenna to switch from band B to band D is N2.
- N1 is greater than N2.
- the present disclosure assumes that the terminal performs switching according to the maximum switching gap when the terminal has multiple switching gaps.
- the initial states of the two uplink antennas are band A and band B
- the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are band C and band D respectively.
- the switching gap required for one uplink antenna to switch from band A to band C is N1
- the switching gap required for the other uplink antenna to switch from band B to band D is N2.
- N1 is greater than N2.
- the base station will assume that the terminal switches the uplink antenna according to N1. After the switching gap N1, band A has switched to band C, and band B has also switched to band D. In this way, it can be guaranteed that the base station will schedule the uplink services on band A and band C only after the uplink antenna is switched from band A to band C.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
- the device 340 for determining an uplink antenna switching mode includes:
- a receiving module 341, configured to receive downlink control information sent by a network device, wherein the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching;
- the processing module 342 is used to determine an uplink antenna switching mode according to the multiple uplink services and/or the downlink control information.
- the uplink antenna switching mode is a first switching mode, and the first switching mode is:
- the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch, and/or the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch based on a switching gap.
- the uplink antenna switching mode is a second switching mode
- the second switching mode is:
- the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, and/or the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- a processing module configured to determine that the downlink control information and the plurality of uplink services are located in different frequency bands
- the processing module is configured to determine that the multiple uplink services require uplink antenna switching.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- a processing module configured to determine that the multiple uplink services start simultaneously
- the processing module is configured to determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- the multiple uplink services are started simultaneously including at least one of the following:
- the number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- the processing module is configured so that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located are different, and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain.
- the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing;
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing;
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the first symbol alignment of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services includes:
- a first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
- the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service
- the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
- the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- the processing module is configured to determine the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services according to a reference frequency band, wherein the reference frequency band includes a frequency band with a maximum subcarrier spacing or a frequency band with a minimum subcarrier spacing among multiple frequency bands.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- the processing module is configured to determine that the mode of switching the multiple uplink antennas is the second switching mode.
- the multiple uplink services not starting at the same time include at least one of the following:
- the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned
- the number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- a processing module configured to determine the alignment of multiple downlink control information
- the processing module is configured to determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- the alignment of the multiple downlink control information includes:
- the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two downlink control information are located are different.
- the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol
- the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
- the left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol
- the right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol
- the left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol
- the right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- the processing module is configured to overlap the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
- the left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol
- the right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol
- the left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol
- the right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- a processing module configured to determine that a plurality of downlink control information are not aligned
- the processing module is configured to determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- the multiple downlink control information are not aligned, including:
- the subcarrier spacing of the two frequency bands where the downlink control information is located is different.
- the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing carries the downlink control information.
- the first symbol of the channel does not overlap with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information in a frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain.
- the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the multiple downlink control information are not aligned, including:
- the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- a processing module configured to determine that the downlink control information of the multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information
- the processing module is configured to determine that the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink and downlink services is the first switching mode.
- the scheduling transmission module is configured such that, during the process of the uplink antenna switching from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on a first frequency band, wherein the first frequency band is a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the uplink service is located, and/or a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the downlink control information is located.
- the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
- the scheduling transmission module is configured such that during the process of the uplink antenna switching from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band, wherein the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is not concurrent with any frequency band.
- Fig. 35 is a block diagram of a user equipment device 800 according to an exemplary embodiment.
- the device 800 may be a mobile phone, a computer, a digital broadcast terminal, a messaging device, a game console, a tablet device, a medical device, a fitness device, a personal digital assistant, etc.
- the device 800 may include one or more of the following components: a processing component 802 , a memory 804 , a power component 806 , a multimedia component 808 , an audio component 810 , an input/output interface 812 , a sensor component 814 , and a communication component 816 .
- the processing component 802 generally controls the overall operation of the device 800, such as operations associated with display, phone calls, data communications, camera operations, and recording operations.
- the processing component 802 may include one or more processors 820 to execute instructions to complete all or part of the steps of the above-mentioned method.
- the processing component 802 may include one or more modules to facilitate the interaction between the processing component 802 and other components.
- the processing component 802 may include a multimedia module to facilitate the interaction between the multimedia component 808 and the processing component 802.
- the memory 804 is configured to store various types of data to support operations on the device 800. Examples of such data include instructions for any application or method operating on the device 800, contact data, phone book data, messages, pictures, videos, etc.
- the memory 804 can be implemented by any type of volatile or non-volatile storage device or a combination thereof, such as static random access memory (SRAM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), read-only memory (ROM), magnetic memory, flash memory, magnetic disk or optical disk.
- SRAM static random access memory
- EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
- EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
- PROM programmable read-only memory
- ROM read-only memory
- magnetic memory flash memory
- flash memory magnetic disk or optical disk.
- the power supply component 806 provides power to the various components of the device 800.
- the power supply component 806 may include a power management system, one or more power supplies, and other components associated with generating, managing, and distributing power for the device 800.
- the multimedia component 808 includes a screen that provides an output interface between the device 800 and the user.
- the screen may include a liquid crystal display (LCD) and a touch panel (TP). If the screen includes a touch panel, the screen may be implemented as a touch screen to receive input signals from the user.
- the touch panel includes one or more touch sensors to sense touch, slide, and gestures on the touch panel. The touch sensor may not only sense the boundaries of the touch or slide action, but also detect the duration and pressure associated with the touch or slide operation.
- the multimedia component 808 includes a front camera and/or a rear camera. When the device 800 is in an operating mode, such as a shooting mode or a video mode, the front camera and/or the rear camera may receive external multimedia data. Each front camera and rear camera may be a fixed optical lens system or have a focal length and optical zoom capability.
- the audio component 810 is configured to output and/or input audio signals.
- the audio component 810 includes a microphone (MIC), and when the device 800 is in an operating mode, such as a call mode, a recording mode, and a speech recognition mode, the microphone is configured to receive an external audio signal.
- the received audio signal can be further stored in the memory 804 or sent via the communication component 816.
- the audio component 810 also includes a speaker for outputting audio signals.
- the input/output interface 812 provides an interface between the processing component 802 and the peripheral interface module. Be it a keyboard, a click wheel, buttons, etc. These buttons may include, but are not limited to: a home button, a volume button, a start button, and a lock button.
- the sensor assembly 814 includes one or more sensors for providing various aspects of the status assessment of the device 800.
- the sensor assembly 814 can detect the open/closed state of the device 800, the relative positioning of components, such as the display and keypad of the device 800, and the sensor assembly 814 can also detect the position change of the device 800 or a component of the device 800, the presence or absence of user contact with the device 800, the orientation or acceleration/deceleration of the device 800, and the temperature change of the device 800.
- the sensor assembly 814 may include a proximity sensor configured to detect the presence of a nearby object without any physical contact.
- the sensor assembly 814 may also include an optical sensor, such as a CMOS or CCD image sensor, for use in imaging applications.
- the sensor assembly 814 may also include an accelerometer, a gyroscope sensor, a magnetic sensor, a pressure sensor, or a temperature sensor.
- the communication component 816 is configured to facilitate wired or wireless communication between the device 800 and other devices.
- the device 800 can access a wireless network based on a communication standard, such as WiFi, 2G or 3G, or a combination thereof.
- the communication component 816 receives a broadcast signal or broadcast-related information from an external broadcast management system via a broadcast channel.
- the communication component 816 also includes a near field communication (NFC) module to facilitate short-range communication.
- the NFC module can be implemented based on radio frequency identification (RFID) technology, infrared data association (IrDA) technology, ultra-wideband (UWB) technology, Bluetooth (BT) technology and other technologies.
- RFID radio frequency identification
- IrDA infrared data association
- UWB ultra-wideband
- Bluetooth Bluetooth
- the apparatus 800 may be implemented by one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors (DSPs), digital signal processing devices (DSPDs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors or other electronic components to perform the above method.
- ASICs application specific integrated circuits
- DSPs digital signal processors
- DSPDs digital signal processing devices
- PLDs programmable logic devices
- FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
- controllers microcontrollers, microprocessors or other electronic components to perform the above method.
- a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium including instructions is also provided, such as a memory 804 including instructions, and the instructions can be executed by the processor 820 of the device 800 to perform the above method.
- the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium can be a ROM, a random access memory (RAM), a CD-ROM, a magnetic tape, a floppy disk, an optical data storage device, etc.
- the above-mentioned device can also be a part of an independent electronic device.
- the device can be an integrated circuit (IC) or a chip, wherein the integrated circuit can be an IC or a collection of multiple ICs; the chip can include but is not limited to the following types: GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), CPU (Central Processing Unit), FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array), DSP (Digital Signal Processor), ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), SOC (System on Chip, SoC), etc.
- the above-mentioned integrated circuit or chip can be used to execute executable instructions (or codes) to implement the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode.
- the executable instructions can be stored in the integrated circuit or chip, or can be obtained from other devices or equipment, for example, the integrated circuit or chip includes a processor, a memory, and an interface for communicating with other devices.
- the executable instruction can be stored in the memory, and when the executable instruction is executed by the processor, the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode is implemented; alternatively, the integrated circuit or chip can receive the executable instruction through the interface and transmit it to the processor for execution, so as to implement the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode.
- a computer program product includes a computer program executable by a programmable device, and the computer program has a code portion for executing the above method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode when executed by the programmable device.
- FIG36 is a block diagram of a network device 1900 according to an exemplary embodiment.
- the device 1900 may be provided as a base station.
- the base station 1900 includes a processing component 1922, which further includes one or more processors, and a memory resource represented by a memory 1932 for storing instructions executable by the processing component 1922, such as an application.
- the application stored in the memory 1932 may include one or more modules, each corresponding to a set of instructions.
- the processing component 1922 is configured to execute instructions to perform the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode.
- the device 1900 may also include a power component 1926 configured to perform power management of the device 1900 , a wired or wireless network interface 1950 configured to connect the device 1900 to a network, and an input/output interface 1958 .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
The present disclosure relates to the field of communications. Provided are a method and apparatus for determining an uplink antenna switching mode, and a storage medium. The method comprises: receiving at least one piece of downlink control information sent by a network device, the downlink control information being used for scheduling a plurality of uplink services performing uplink antenna switching; and, according to the plurality of uplink services and/or the downlink control information, determining an uplink antenna switching mode. Using the method and apparatus for determining an uplink antenna switching mode and the storage medium provided in the present disclosure can provide a terminal with occurrence conditions of uplink antenna switching modes, allowing the terminal to better select an uplink antenna switching mode.
Description
本公开涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法、装置和存储介质。The present disclosure relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a method, device and storage medium for determining an uplink antenna switching mode.
在版本-18(Release-18,Rel-18)支持的上行(uplink,UL)天线切换(Tx switching)中,将终端在进行上行传输时支持的频带数量从2扩展到3或4。In the uplink (UL) antenna switching (Tx switching) supported by Release-18 (Rel-18), the number of frequency bands supported by the terminal during uplink transmission is expanded from 2 to 3 or 4.
在版本-16/17(Release-16/17,Rel-16/17,Rel16/17)的协议版本中,为了保证终端有足够的时间进行上行天线的切换,设置了切换间隙(gap),终端可以在切换间隙的切换间隙内,完成上行天线在不同频带之间的切换。In the protocol version of Release-16/17 (Rel-16/17, Rel16/17), in order to ensure that the terminal has enough time to switch the uplink antenna, a switching gap is set. The terminal can complete the switching of the uplink antenna between different frequency bands within the switching gap.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本公开提供一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法、装置和存储介质。The present disclosure provides a method, an apparatus and a storage medium for determining an uplink antenna switching mode.
根据本公开实施例的第一方面,提供一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,所述方法由用户设备执行,包括:According to a first aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode is provided, the method being executed by a user equipment, including:
接收网络设备发送的至少一个下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息用于调度进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务;receiving at least one downlink control information sent by a network device, where the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching;
根据所述多个上行业务和/或下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式。The uplink antenna switching mode is determined according to the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information.
根据本公开实施例的第二方面,提供一种确定上行天线切换模式的装置,包括:According to a second aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode is provided, including:
接收模块,用于接收网络设备发送的下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息用于调度进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务;A receiving module, used to receive downlink control information sent by a network device, wherein the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching;
处理模块,用于根据所述多个上行业务和/或所述下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式。The processing module is used to determine the uplink antenna switching mode according to the multiple uplink services and/or the downlink control information.
根据本公开实施例的第三方面,提供一种用户设备,包括:According to a third aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a user equipment is provided, including:
处理器;processor;
用于存储处理器可执行指令的存储器;a memory for storing processor-executable instructions;
其中,所述处理器被配置为在执行所述可执行指令时,实现本公开实施例的第一方面提供的确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤。The processor is configured to implement the steps of the method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode provided in the first aspect of the embodiment of the present disclosure when executing the executable instructions.
根据本公开实施例的第四方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序指令,其中,该程序指令被处理器执行时实现本公开实施例的第一方面提供的确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤。According to a fourth aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, on which computer program instructions are stored, wherein the program instructions, when executed by a processor, implement the steps of the method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode provided in the first aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
本公开的实施例提供的技术方案可以包括以下有益效果:The technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure may have the following beneficial effects:
可以接收网络设备发送的至少一个下行控制信息,根据所述多个上行业务和/或下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式,其明确了上行天线切换的模式所发生的条件,以确保终端在执行上行天线切换时,能够更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。It can receive at least one downlink control information sent by a network device, and determine the uplink antenna switching mode based on the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information, which clarifies the conditions under which the uplink antenna switching mode occurs to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分,示出了符合本公开的实施例,并与说明书一起用于解释本公开的原理。The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments consistent with the present disclosure and, together with the description, serve to explain the principles of the present disclosure.
图1是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 1 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图2是根据一示例性实施例示出的上行天线从下行控制信息所在的频带切换至上行业务所在的频带的一种示意图。Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
图3是根据一示例性实施例示出的上行天线从下行控制信息所在的频带切换至上行业务所在的频带的一种示意图。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
图4是根据一示例性实施例示出的上行天线从下行控制信息所在的频带切换至上行业务所在的频带的一种示意图。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
图5是根据一示例性实施例示出的上行天线从下行控制信息所在的频带切换至上行业务所在的频带的一种示意图。Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram showing that an uplink antenna switches from a frequency band where downlink control information is located to a frequency band where uplink services are located according to an exemplary embodiment.
图6是根据一示例性实施例示出的不同子载波间隔的频带上承载上行业务或下行控制信息
的信道的首个符号对齐的一种示意图。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing how uplink services or downlink control information are carried on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment. A schematic diagram of the first symbol alignment of the channel.
图7是根据一示例性实施例示出的不同子载波间隔的频带上承载上行业务或下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐的一种示意图。Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
图8是根据一示例性实施例示出的不同子载波间隔的频带上承载上行业务或下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐的一种示意图。Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
图9是根据一示例性实施例示出的不同子载波间隔的频带上承载上行业务或下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐的一种示意图。Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
图10是根据一示例性实施例示出的不同子载波间隔的频带上承载上行业务或下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐的一种示意图。Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the alignment of the first symbol of a channel carrying uplink services or downlink control information on frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings according to an exemplary embodiment.
图11是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图12是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图13是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图14是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图15是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 15 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图16是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 16 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图17是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图18是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图19是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图20是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图21是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图22是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图23是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图24是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图25是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 25 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图26是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图27是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图28是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图29是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图30是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图31是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图32是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图33是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法的步骤流程图。FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图34是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的装置的框图。Fig. 34 is a block diagram showing a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图35是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的装置的框图。Fig. 35 is a block diagram showing a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
图36是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的装置的框图。Fig. 36 is a block diagram showing a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment.
这里将详细地对示例性实施例进行说明,其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图时,除非另有表示,不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下示例性实施例中所描述的实施方式并不代表与本公开相一致的所有实施方式。相反,它们仅是与如所附权利要求书中所详述的、本公开的一些方面相一致的装置和方法的例子。Exemplary embodiments will be described in detail herein, examples of which are shown in the accompanying drawings. When the following description refers to the drawings, the same numbers in different drawings represent the same or similar elements unless otherwise indicated. The embodiments described in the following exemplary embodiments do not represent all embodiments consistent with the present disclosure. Instead, they are merely examples of devices and methods consistent with some aspects of the present disclosure as detailed in the appended claims.
可以理解的是,本公开中“多个”是指两个或两个以上,其它量词与之类似。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。单数形式的“一种”、“所述”和“该”也旨在包括多数形式,除非上下文清楚地表示其他含义。It is to be understood that in the present disclosure, "plurality" refers to two or more than two, and other quantifiers are similar thereto. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, A and/or B may represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. The singular forms "a", "the" and "the" are also intended to include plural forms, unless the context clearly indicates other meanings.
进一步可以理解的是,术语“第一”、“第二”等用于描述各种信息,但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开,并不表示特定的顺序或者重要程度。实际上,“第一”、“第二”等表述完全可以互换使用,例如本公开提出的对第一切换模式与第二切换模式的表述可以互换使用。
It is further understood that the terms "first", "second", etc. are used to describe various information, but such information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other, and do not indicate a specific order or degree of importance. In fact, the expressions "first", "second", etc. can be used interchangeably. For example, the expressions of the first switching mode and the second switching mode proposed in the present disclosure can be used interchangeably.
进一步可以理解的是,本公开实施例中尽管在附图中以特定的顺序描述操作,但是不应将其理解为要求按照所示的特定顺序或是串行顺序来执行这些操作,或是要求执行全部所示的操作以得到期望的结果。在特定环境中,多任务和并行处理可能是有利的。It is further understood that, although the operations are described in a specific order in the drawings in the embodiments of the present disclosure, it should not be understood as requiring the operations to be performed in the specific order shown or in a serial order, or requiring the execution of all the operations shown to obtain the desired results. In certain environments, multitasking and parallel processing may be advantageous.
需要说明的是,本申请中所有获取信号、信息或数据的动作都是在遵照所在地国家相应的数据保护法规政策的前提下,并获得由相应装置所有者给予授权的情况下进行的。It should be noted that all actions of acquiring signals, information or data in this application are carried out in compliance with the relevant data protection laws and policies of the country where they are located and with the authorization given by the owner of the corresponding device.
为便于理解,先介绍下本公开涉及的术语。For ease of understanding, the terms involved in the present disclosure are first introduced.
1、上行天线(Tx天线),受制于终端的热限制和功耗等限制,终端具有有限数量的射频(RF)链来用于处理和接收/发送信号,例如终端可以具有两个射频链路,两个射频链路可以为两个发送(Tx)链路、两个接收(Rx)链路与两个发送链路/接收链路等。在此过程中,多根上行天线可以共用一条射频链路,且一根上行天线同一时刻通常是在一个频带上。1. Uplink antenna (Tx antenna), subject to the thermal and power consumption limitations of the terminal, the terminal has a limited number of radio frequency (RF) chains for processing and receiving/transmitting signals. For example, the terminal can have two RF links, and the two RF links can be two transmit (Tx) links, two receive (Rx) links, and two transmit links/receive links. In this process, multiple uplink antennas can share one RF link, and one uplink antenna is usually on one frequency band at the same time.
2、上行天线切换(UL Tx switching),在基站发送的下行控制信息(Downlink Control information,DCI)所位于的频带,与基站调度的多个上行业务所位于的频带(band)不同的情况下,终端需要将上行天线从下行控制信息所位于的频带,切换至多个上行业务所位于的频带上,该过程可以称为上行天线切换。例如,版本-18中支持两根上行天线通过以下多个方案进行切换:2. Uplink antenna switching (UL Tx switching). When the frequency band of the downlink control information (DCI) sent by the base station is different from the frequency band of multiple uplink services scheduled by the base station, the terminal needs to switch the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where multiple uplink services are located. This process can be called uplink antenna switching. For example, version 18 supports switching between two uplink antennas through the following multiple schemes:
方案1,终端在切换之前,两根上行天线分别在band A与band B,终端切换后的两根天线分别在band C与band D。此时终端有两种实现方式:方式1:其中一根上行天线从band A切换至band C,另一根上行天线从band B切换至band D,此时决定切换间隙的为N{A-C}与N{B-D};方式2:其中一根上行天线从band B切换至band C,另一根上行天线从band A切换至band D,此时决定切换间隙的为N{B-C}与N{A-D}。Solution 1: Before the terminal switches, the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B respectively. After the terminal switches, the two antennas are in band C and band D respectively. At this time, the terminal has two implementation methods: Method 1: One of the uplink antennas switches from band A to band C, and the other uplink antenna switches from band B to band D. At this time, the switching gap is determined by N{A-C} and N{B-D}; Method 2: One of the uplink antennas switches from band B to band C, and the other uplink antenna switches from band A to band D. At this time, the switching gap is determined by N{B-C} and N{A-D}.
方案2,终端切换之前两根上行天线都在band A上,终端切换后的两根天线分别在band C与band D,则此时决定切换间隙的为N{A-C}与N{A-D}。Solution 2: Before the terminal switches, the two uplink antennas are on band A. After the terminal switches, the two antennas are on band C and band D respectively. At this time, N{A-C} and N{A-D} determine the switching gap.
方案3,终端切换之前两根上行天线分别在band A与band B,终端切换后的两根天线在band C,则此时决定切换间隙的为N{A-C}与N{B-C}。Solution 3: Before the terminal switches, the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B respectively. After the terminal switches, the two antennas are in band C. At this time, the switching gap is determined by N{A-C} and N{B-C}.
3、子载波间隔(Sub-Carrier Space,SCS),在载波信号中具有多个子载波,每个子载波之间的间隔则是子载波间隔。一个上行业务或一个下行控制信息同一时间通常在一个频带上传输,一个频带对应有一种固定类型的子载波间隔。示例地,band A的子载波间隔为15KHz,band B的子载波间隔为30KHz等。3. Sub-Carrier Space (SCS). There are multiple sub-carriers in the carrier signal, and the interval between each sub-carrier is the sub-carrier spacing. An uplink service or a downlink control message is usually transmitted on a frequency band at the same time. A frequency band corresponds to a fixed type of sub-carrier spacing. For example, the sub-carrier spacing of band A is 15KHz, the sub-carrier spacing of band B is 30KHz, and so on.
4、切换间隙(Switch gap),切换间隙也可以称为切换时间或者切换周期,在终端将上行天线从一个频带切换至另外一个频带的过程中,存在切换间隙。在切换间隙的时间内,终端可以对上行天线执行切换操作,并且在切换间隙的时间内,基站不会在上行天线切换前所在的频带与上行天线切换后所在的频带调度上行传输。4. Switch gap: The switching gap can also be called the switching time or switching period. When the terminal switches the uplink antenna from one frequency band to another, there is a switching gap. During the switching gap, the terminal can perform a switching operation on the uplink antenna, and during the switching gap, the base station will not schedule uplink transmission in the frequency band before the uplink antenna is switched and the frequency band after the uplink antenna is switched.
5、下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI),下行控制信息是在物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)上传输的,与物理上行共享信道(PUSCH)、物理下行共享信道(PDSCH)相关的控制信息,下行控制信息中包含了资源块的分配信息以及调制方式等相关内容。5. Downlink Control Information (DCI): Downlink control information is transmitted on the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). It is control information related to the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH). The downlink control information includes resource block allocation information, modulation method and other related content.
相关技术中,在网络设备发送的下行控制信息与网络设备调度的多个上行业务位于不同频带的情况下,此时终端需要进行上行天线切换,以将多个上行天线从下行控制信息所在的频带切换至多个上行业务所在的频带上。In the related art, when the downlink control information sent by the network device and the multiple uplink services scheduled by the network device are in different frequency bands, the terminal needs to perform uplink antenna switching to switch the multiple uplink antennas from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located.
然而,多个上行天线的切换模式可以是多个上行天线同时切换,也可以是多个上行天线分别切换。However, the switching mode of the multiple uplink antennas may be that the multiple uplink antennas are switched simultaneously, or the multiple uplink antennas are switched separately.
请参阅图2示出了两个上行天线同时切换的一种示例,图2中的DCI1、DCI0分别位于band A、band B上,上行业务PUSCH1、PUSCH0分别位于band C、band D上,且PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置相同,均位于T0,即两个上行业务同时开始,N1为终端将上行天线从band A切换至band C所需的切换间隙,N2为终端将上行天线从band B切换至band D的切换间隙。从图2可以看出,终端在两组频带对上进行上行天线切换的时间N1与N2是一致的,所以终端所进行的上行天线切换的模式是同时切换,视为两组频带对的上行天线切换为一次。Please refer to FIG. 2, which shows an example of simultaneous switching of two uplink antennas. In FIG. 2, DCI1 and DCI0 are located on band A and band B respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D respectively. The starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both located at T 0 , that is, the two uplink services start at the same time, N1 is the switching gap required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C, and N2 is the switching gap for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D. As can be seen from FIG. 2, the time N1 and N2 for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna on the two sets of frequency band pairs are consistent, so the mode of uplink antenna switching performed by the terminal is simultaneous switching, which is regarded as the uplink antenna switching of the two sets of frequency band pairs as one time.
请参阅图3示出的两个上行天线同时切换的另一种示例,与图3不同之处在于,PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置不同,PUSCH1的起始位置为T0,2,PUSCH0的起始位置为T0,1,即两个上行业务为不同时开始。虽然两个上行业务的起始位置不同,但是二者的切换间隙
是从N1与N2中选择最大值,即,是以PUSCH1为准,将N1作为两组频带对进行上行天线切换的切换间隙,所以这两组频带对的上行天线切换为一次。Please refer to FIG. 3 for another example of simultaneous switching of two uplink antennas. The difference from FIG. 3 is that the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are different. The starting position of PUSCH1 is T 0,2 and the starting position of PUSCH0 is T 0,1 , that is, the two uplink services do not start at the same time. Although the starting positions of the two uplink services are different, the switching gap between the two is The maximum value is selected from N1 and N2, that is, based on PUSCH1, N1 is used as the switching gap for uplink antenna switching of two frequency band pairs, so the uplink antennas of these two frequency band pairs are switched once.
请参阅图4示出了两个上行天线分别切换的一种示例,图4中PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置相同,均位于T0,从图4中可以看出,终端在两组频带对上进行上行天线切换的时间N1与N2是不同的,所以终端所进行的上行天线切换的模式是分别切换,视为两组频带对的上行天线切换次数为多次,上行天线在每个频带对的切换都是独立的一次切换。Please refer to FIG. 4 , which shows an example of two uplink antennas being switched separately. In FIG. 4 , the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both located at T 0 . It can be seen from FIG. 4 that the times N1 and N2 at which the terminal performs uplink antenna switching on the two frequency band pairs are different, so the uplink antenna switching mode performed by the terminal is switching separately, and the number of uplink antenna switching times for the two frequency band pairs is regarded as multiple times, and the switching of the uplink antenna on each frequency band pair is an independent switching.
请参阅图5示出了两个上行天线分别切换的另一种示例,图5与图4不同之处在于,PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置不同,PUSCH1的起始位置为T0,2,PUSCH0的起始位置为T0,1,此时PUSCH1的切换间隙N2与PUSCH1的起始位置T0,2为准,PUSCH0的切换间隙N1与PUSCH0的起始位置T0,1为准,所以终端在两组频带对上进行上行天线切换的切换间隙N1与N2也是不同的,是独立的。Please refer to Figure 5, which shows another example of switching two uplink antennas separately. The difference between Figure 5 and Figure 4 is that the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are different. The starting position of PUSCH1 is T 0,2 , and the starting position of PUSCH0 is T 0,1 . At this time, the switching gap N2 of PUSCH1 is based on the starting position T 0,2 of PUSCH1, and the switching gap N1 of PUSCH0 is based on the starting position T 0,1 of PUSCH0. Therefore, the switching gaps N1 and N2 for the terminal to switch the uplink antennas on the two sets of frequency band pairs are also different and independent.
可见,在终端的上行天线切换的模式存在一次切换与多次切换等至少两种不同的模式的情况下,需要明确上行天线切换的模式的发生条件,以保证终端在执行上行天线切换时能够更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。It can be seen that when the terminal's uplink antenna switching mode has at least two different modes, such as one switching and multiple switching, it is necessary to clarify the conditions for the uplink antenna switching mode to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
图1是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 1 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S101中,接收网络设备发送的至少一个下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息用于调度进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务。In step S101, at least one downlink control information sent by a network device is received, where the downlink control information is used to schedule a plurality of uplink services for uplink antenna switching.
其中,本公开任意实施例提出的用户设备可以是手机、平板、便携电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等,本公开对应用场景不做限定,用户设备有时也可以称为终端设备、终端、接入终端、UE单元、UE站、移动设备、移动站、移动台(mobile station)、移动客户端等。为便于读者阅读,下文将用户设备简称为终端。Among them, the user equipment proposed in any embodiment of the present disclosure can be a mobile phone, a tablet, a portable computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality (VR)) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control (industrial control), a wireless terminal in a smart grid (smart grid), a wireless terminal in transportation safety (transportation safety), a wireless terminal in a smart city (smart city), a wireless terminal in a smart home (smart home), etc. The present disclosure does not limit the application scenario, and the user equipment may sometimes also be referred to as a terminal device, a terminal, an access terminal, a UE unit, a UE station, a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile station (mobile station), a mobile client, etc. For the convenience of readers, the user equipment will be referred to as a terminal below.
其中,在一些无线通信系统中,终端与基站之间会进行上行通信与下行通信,上行通信与下行通信需要传输资源,如果终端需要向基站发送数据,终端会从基站请求上行资源,基站将上行资源配置在下行控制信息中,终端接收到下行控制信息之后,使用下行控制信息中的上行资源来调度上行业务,终端再将上行业务的数据通过上行链路发送至基站。Among them, in some wireless communication systems, uplink communication and downlink communication will be carried out between the terminal and the base station. The uplink communication and downlink communication require transmission resources. If the terminal needs to send data to the base station, the terminal will request uplink resources from the base station. The base station configures the uplink resources in the downlink control information. After the terminal receives the downlink control information, it uses the uplink resources in the downlink control information to schedule the uplink service, and the terminal then sends the uplink service data to the base station through the uplink.
其中,用户设备会接收网络设备发送的至少一个下行控制信息,至少一个下行控制信息用于调度用户设备的多个上行业务,当至少一个下行控制信息所在的频带与多个上行业务所在的频带不同的情况下,需要将上行天线从下行控制信息所在的频带切换至上行业务所在的频带。Among them, the user equipment will receive at least one downlink control information sent by the network equipment, and the at least one downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services of the user equipment. When the frequency band where the at least one downlink control information is located is different from the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located, it is necessary to switch the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located.
示例地,在至少一个下行控制信息的数量为1个举例,在一个下行控制信息所在的频带与多个上行业务所在的频带不同的情况下,则需要将上行天线从该下行控制信息所在的频带分别切换到多个上行业务所在的频带上。For example, when the number of at least one downlink control information is 1, when the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is different from the frequency band where multiple uplink services are located, the uplink antenna needs to be switched from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located.
示例地,在至少一个下行控制信息的数量为多个举例,在多个下行控制信息所在的频带与多个上行业务所在的频带不同的情况下,则需要将上行天线从多个下行控制信息所在的频带分别切换到多个上行业务所在的频带上。For example, when the number of at least one downlink control information is multiple, and the frequency band where the multiple downlink control information is located is different from the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located, it is necessary to switch the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the multiple downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the multiple uplink services are located.
在步骤S102中,根据所述多个上行业务和/或下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式。In step S102, the uplink antenna switching mode is determined according to the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information.
其中,多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式包括第一切换模式与第二切换模式。The uplink antenna switching modes triggered by multiple uplink services include a first switching mode and a second switching mode.
第一切换模式包括以下至少一种:用户设备执行一次上行天线切换、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换被视为一次、用户设备基于一个切换间隙执行上行天线切换、用户设备执行上行天线切换的频带对共享一个切换间隙、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换共享一个切换间隙。The first switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch once, multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment are regarded as one, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on a switching gap, the frequency band pair for which the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching shares a switching gap, and multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment share a switching gap.
第二切换模式包括以下至少一种:用户设备执行多次上行天线切换、用户设备基于多个切换间隙执行上行天线切换、用户设备执行上行天线切换的频带对的切换间隙是独立的、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换使用的切换间隙是独立的。The second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for which the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
其中,由于下行控制信息所在的频带是上行天线切换前的频带,上行业务所在的频带是上行天线切换后的频带,二者均与上行天线切换相关,所以可以基于下行控制信息与多个上行业务中的至少一种,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式是第一切换模式还是第二切换模式。
Among them, since the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is the frequency band before the uplink antenna switching, and the frequency band where the uplink service is located is the frequency band after the uplink antenna switching, both are related to the uplink antenna switching. Therefore, based on the downlink control information and at least one of the multiple uplink services, it is possible to determine whether the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is the first switching mode or the second switching mode.
示例地,可以根据需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式。For example, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services may be determined according to the multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching.
示例地,可以根据调度所述多个上行业务的下行控制信息,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式。For example, the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services may be determined according to the downlink control information for scheduling the multiple uplink services.
示例地,可以根据需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务与调度所述多个上行业务的下行控制信息,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式。For example, the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by multiple uplink services may be determined according to multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching and downlink control information for scheduling the multiple uplink services.
通过上述技术方案,可以接收网络设备发送的至少一个下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息用于调度进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务;根据所述多个上行业务和/或下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式,其明确了上行天线切换的模式所发生的条件,以确保终端在执行上行天线切换时,能够更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。Through the above technical solution, at least one downlink control information sent by a network device can be received, and the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching; based on the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information, the uplink antenna switching mode is determined, which clarifies the conditions under which the uplink antenna switching mode occurs, so as to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
图11是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 11 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment, the method being executed by a user equipment, comprising the following steps:
在步骤S201中,确定下行控制信息与所述多个上行业务位于不同频带。In step S201, it is determined that the downlink control information and the multiple uplink services are located in different frequency bands.
其中,在网络设备发送的下行控制信息与网络设备调度的多个上行业务位于的频带相同的情况下,则确定多个上行业务无需进行上行天线切换;在网络设备发送的下行控制信息与所述网络设备调度的多个上行业务位于不同频带的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务需要进行上行天线切换,以适应新的频带上的数据收发。Among them, when the downlink control information sent by the network device is located in the same frequency band as the multiple uplink services scheduled by the network device, it is determined that the multiple uplink services do not need to perform uplink antenna switching; when the downlink control information sent by the network device is located in different frequency bands than the multiple uplink services scheduled by the network device, it is determined that the multiple uplink services need to perform uplink antenna switching to adapt to data reception and transmission on the new frequency band.
示例地,两根上行天线的初始状态均在band A,两根上行天线切换后的天线状态分别在band B与band C,即终端在band A中接收到基站的调度信息,需要在band B和/或band C上进行上行业务发送。For example, the initial states of the two uplink antennas are both in band A, and the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are respectively in band B and band C. That is, the terminal receives the scheduling information of the base station in band A and needs to send uplink services on band B and/or band C.
示例地,两根上行天线的初始状态在band A与band B,两根上行天线切换后的天线状态在band C与band D,即终端在band A和/或band B中接收到基站发送的调度信息,需要在band C和/或band D上进行上行业务发送。For example, the initial states of the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B, and the antenna states after switching are in band C and band D, that is, the terminal receives the scheduling information sent by the base station in band A and/or band B, and needs to send uplink services on band C and/or band D.
示例地,两根上行天线的初始状态在band A与band B,两根上行天线切换后的天线状态均在band C,即终端在band A和/或band B中接收到基站发送的调度信息,需要在band C上进行上行业务发送。For example, the initial states of the two uplink antennas are in band A and band B, and the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are both in band C, that is, the terminal receives the scheduling information sent by the base station in band A and/or band B, and needs to send uplink services on band C.
可以理解的是,初始状态指的是上行天线未切换前所处的状态,即下行控制信息所在的频带;天线状态指的是上行天线切换后所处的状态,即上行业务所在的频带。多个下行控制信息所在的频带可以是同一个频带,也可以是不同的频带,多个上行业务所在的频带可以是同一频带,也可以是不同频带。It can be understood that the initial state refers to the state before the uplink antenna is switched, that is, the frequency band where the downlink control information is located; the antenna state refers to the state after the uplink antenna is switched, that is, the frequency band where the uplink service is located. The frequency bands where multiple downlink control information are located can be the same frequency band or different frequency bands, and the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located can be the same frequency band or different frequency bands.
在步骤S202中,确定所述多个上行业务需要进行上行天线切换。In step S202, it is determined that the multiple uplink services require uplink antenna switching.
其中,可以响应确定下行控制信息与所述多个上行业务位于不同频带,确定多个上行业务需要进行上行天线切换,此时可以根据多个上行业务和/或下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式。In which, in response to determining that the downlink control information and the multiple uplink services are in different frequency bands, it can be determined that multiple uplink services require uplink antenna switching. At this time, the uplink antenna switching mode can be determined based on multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information.
通过上述技术方案,在网络设备发送的下行控制信息与所述网络设备调度的多个上行业务位于不同频带的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务需要进行上行天线切换;根据需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务与调度所述多个上行业务的下行控制信息中的至少一种,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式,其明确了上行天线切换的模式所发生的条件,以确保终端在执行上行天线切换时,能够更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。Through the above technical solution, when the downlink control information sent by the network device and the multiple uplink services scheduled by the network device are in different frequency bands, it is determined that the multiple uplink services need to perform uplink antenna switching; based on the multiple uplink services that need to perform uplink antenna switching and at least one of the downlink control information that schedules the multiple uplink services, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined, which clarifies the conditions under which the uplink antenna switching mode occurs, so as to ensure that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode when performing uplink antenna switching.
图12是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 12 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S301中,确定所述多个上行业务同时开始。In step S301, it is determined that the multiple uplink services start simultaneously.
其中,多个上行业务同时开始包括以下至少一种:The simultaneous start of multiple uplink services includes at least one of the following:
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐;Aligning first symbols of channels carrying the multiple uplink services;
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值。The number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
在步骤S302中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In step S302, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,第一切换模式包括以下至少一种:用户设备执行一次上行天线切换、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换被视为一次、用户设备基于一个切换间隙执行上行天线切换、用户设备执行上行天线切换的频带对共享一个切换间隙、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换共享一个切换间隙。
Among them, the first switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch once, multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment are regarded as one, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on a switching gap, the frequency band pair for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching shares a switching gap, and multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment share a switching gap.
其中,在需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务不同时开始的情况下,如果将多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式确定为第一切换模式,第一方面会导致基站无法及时地在部分频带上调度上行传输;第二方面对终端能力的要求较高;第三方面,协议需要定义多个上行天线共享切换间隙的参考点,对于协议而言较为复杂。Among them, when multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching do not start at the same time, if the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services is determined as the first switching mode, on the one hand, it will cause the base station to be unable to schedule uplink transmission on some frequency bands in a timely manner; on the other hand, it places high requirements on terminal capabilities; on the third hand, the protocol needs to define reference points for multiple uplink antennas to share switching gaps, which is more complicated for the protocol.
示例地,请参阅图3所示,图3中的DCI1、DCI0分别位于band A、band B上,上行业务PUSCH1、PUSCH0分别位于band C、band D上,且PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置不同,PUSCH1的起始位置为T0,2,PUSCH0的起始位置为T0,1,即两个上行业务不同时开始,N1为终端将上行天线从band A切换至band C所需的时间,N2为终端将上行天线从band B切换至band D的时间,MAX(N1,N2)代表从N1与N2中选择最大值,作为两个上行天线的切换间隙,图3示出的MAX(N1,N2)为N1。For example, please refer to Figure 3, in which DCI1 and DCI0 are located on band A and band B respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D respectively, and the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are different, the starting position of PUSCH1 is T 0,2 , and the starting position of PUSCH0 is T 0,1 , that is, the two uplink services do not start at the same time, N1 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C, and N2 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D. MAX(N1, N2) represents selecting the maximum value from N1 and N2 as the switching gap between the two uplink antennas. MAX(N1, N2) shown in Figure 3 is N1.
在两个上行业务不同时开始的情况下,说明上行天线在两组频带对上真正所需的切换间隙是不同的,例如band A与band C频带对,相较于band B与band D频带对所需的切换间隙更长,此时若将上行天线切换的切换间隙确定为N1,两个上行天线的切换均按照N1来进行切换,就导致上行天线在band B与band D频带对上的切换间隙N1相较于实际所需的切换间隙N2增加了,在这部分增加的时长内,基站也无法band B与band D上调度上行传输。When the two uplink services start at different times, it means that the actual switching gaps required for the uplink antennas on the two frequency band pairs are different. For example, the switching gap required for the band A and band C frequency band pair is longer than that required for the band B and band D frequency band pair. At this time, if the switching gap for the uplink antenna switching is determined to be N1, the switching of the two uplink antennas is performed according to N1, which results in the switching gap N1 of the uplink antenna on the band B and band D frequency band pair being increased compared to the actually required switching gap N2. During this increased duration, the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on band B and band D.
因此,为了避免上述三方面的情况,本公开提出在需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务同时开始的情况下,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。Therefore, in order to avoid the above three situations, the present disclosure proposes that when multiple uplink services requiring uplink antenna switching start at the same time, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode.
示例地,请参阅图2所示,图2中的DCI1、DCI0分别位于band A、band B上,上行业务PUSCH1、PUSCH0分别位于band C、band D上,且PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置相同,均位于T0,即两个上行业务同时开始,N1为终端将上行天线从band A切换至band C所需的时间,N2为终端将上行天线从band B切换至band D的时间。For example, please refer to Figure 2, in which DCI1 and DCI0 are located on band A and band B respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D respectively, and the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both located at T 0 , that is, the two uplink services start at the same time, N1 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C, and N2 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D.
从图2可以看出,由于两个上行业务是同时开始的,所以两组频带对实际所需的切换间隙N1与N2是相同的,此时若将上行天线切换的切换间隙确定为N1或N2,两组频带对会在经过切换间隙N1或N2之后,同时释放band A、band B、band C与band D,也不会存在基站无法在部分频带上及时地调度上行传输的情况发生。As can be seen from Figure 2, since the two uplink services start at the same time, the switching gaps N1 and N2 actually required for the two frequency band pairs are the same. At this time, if the switching gap for uplink antenna switching is determined to be N1 or N2, the two frequency band pairs will release band A, band B, band C and band D at the same time after the switching gap N1 or N2, and there will be no situation where the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on some frequency bands in a timely manner.
通过上述技术方案,在需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务同时开始的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。Through the above technical solution, when multiple uplink services requiring uplink antenna switching start at the same time, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode.
第一方面,由于本公开是在需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务同时开始的情况下,将上行天线的切换模式确定为第一切换模式,而非是在多个上行业务不同时开始的情况下,将上行天线的切换模式确定为第一切换模式,所以多个上行天线实际所需的切换间隙是一致的,基于一致的切换间隙来对多个上行天线进行切换,也能够避免基站无法及时地在部分频带调度上行传输的情况发生。第二方面,对于第一切换模式而言,终端仅需确定一个切换间隙,其确定逻辑较为简单,对终端的要求相对较低。第三方面,协议也无需定义多个上行天线切换的参考点,降低了协议的复杂度。On the one hand, since the present disclosure determines the switching mode of the uplink antenna as the first switching mode when multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching start at the same time, rather than determining the switching mode of the uplink antenna as the first switching mode when multiple uplink services do not start at the same time, the switching gaps actually required by multiple uplink antennas are consistent, and multiple uplink antennas are switched based on the consistent switching gaps, which can also avoid the situation where the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission in some frequency bands in a timely manner. On the second hand, for the first switching mode, the terminal only needs to determine one switching gap, and its determination logic is relatively simple, and the requirements for the terminal are relatively low. On the third hand, the protocol does not need to define reference points for switching multiple uplink antennas, which reduces the complexity of the protocol.
图13是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 13 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S401中,确定承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。In step S401, the first symbol alignment of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services is determined.
其中,承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐可以被视为多个上行业务同时开始。The alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services may be regarded as the multiple uplink services starting simultaneously.
其中,符号可以为时频资源集中的OFDM符号,承载多个上行业务的信道为发送资源,终端使用发送资源可以将上行业务的数据发送至基站,实现上行传输。The symbol may be an OFDM symbol in a time-frequency resource concentration, and the channel carrying multiple uplink services is a transmission resource. The terminal may use the transmission resource to send data of the uplink service to the base station to realize uplink transmission.
可以理解的是,本公开任意实施例提出的承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号,为上行业务占据的物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)的首个符号。It can be understood that the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services proposed in any embodiment of the present disclosure is the first symbol of the physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) occupied by the uplink services.
其中,承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐包括以下至少一种:The first symbol alignment of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services includes at least one of the following:
在多个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔相同的情况下,承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,则被视为承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。When the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located is the same, if the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services overlap in the time domain, it is regarded that the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are aligned.
在上行业务的数量为两个,且两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,被视为承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。When the number of uplink services is two and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located are different, the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain and is regarded as being aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services.
在上行业务的数量为多个,且多个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,可
以被视为承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。When there are multiple uplink services and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the multiple uplink services are located are different, the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service overlaps with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain. The first symbol of the channel considered to carry the multiple uplink services is aligned.
其中,在多个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔相同的情况下,承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,包括以下(1)、(2)中的至少一种:Wherein, when the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located is the same, the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services overlap in the time domain, including at least one of the following (1) and (2):
(1)、承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐,可以视为承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。(1) The left edges of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are aligned, which can be regarded as the alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services.
(2)、承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐,可以视为承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。(2) The right edges of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are aligned, which can be regarded as the alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services.
可以理解的是,本公开任意实施例提出的多个,可以理解为包括两个及两个以上。It can be understood that any multiple embodiments of the present disclosure may be understood to include two or more.
在步骤S402中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In step S402, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,该步骤S402可以参考上述步骤S302,在此不再赘述。Herein, step S402 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
通过上述技术方案,可以在承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐的情况下,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式。Through the above technical solution, when the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are aligned, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the first switching mode.
图14是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 14 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S501中,两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠。In step S501, the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where two uplink services are located are different, and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain.
其中,在上行业务的数量为两个,两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,被视为承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。Among them, when the number of uplink services is two and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located are different, the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, which is regarded as the alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services.
其中,在多个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,多个不同子载波间隔的频带上的信道的符号的长度不同,子载波间隔越大,对应信道的符号的长度越短,例如子载波间隔为15Khz时,符号的长度为66.7us,子载波间隔为30KHz时,符号的长度为33.3us等。Among them, when the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located is different, the symbol lengths of the channels on the frequency bands with different subcarrier spacings are different. The larger the subcarrier spacing, the shorter the length of the corresponding channel symbol. For example, when the subcarrier spacing is 15Khz, the symbol length is 66.7us, and when the subcarrier spacing is 30KHz, the symbol length is 33.3us, etc.
其中,在子载波间隔的数量为两个的情况下,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,包括以下(3)、(4)、(5)、(6)中的至少一种,为便于描述,以下多个示例中将子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号称为符号A,将子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号称为符号B,符号A与符号B仅是便于读者阅读的一种描述方式,不作为对子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号,以及子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号的限定。Among them, when the number of subcarrier spacings is two, the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, including at least one of the following (3), (4), (5), and (6). For the convenience of description, in the following multiple examples, the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is referred to as symbol A, and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing is referred to as symbol B. Symbol A and symbol B are only a description method for the convenience of readers, and are not used as a limitation on the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
(3)、子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。(3) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,请参阅图6所示,在符号A(子载波间隔为15KHz)左侧边缘,符号B(子载波间隔为30KHz)左侧边缘均在虚线10处对齐的情况下,符号A与符号B之间具有一个符号B的重叠区域。For example, please refer to Figure 6, when the left edge of symbol A (subcarrier spacing is 15KHz) and the left edge of symbol B (subcarrier spacing is 30KHz) are aligned at the dotted line 10, there is an overlapping area of symbol B between symbol A and symbol B.
(4)、子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。(4) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,请参阅图7所示,在符号A(子载波间隔为15KHz)右侧边缘,与符号B(子载波间隔为30KHz)右侧边缘均在虚线20处对齐的情况下,符号A与符号B之间具有一个符号B的重叠区域。For example, please refer to Figure 7, when the right edge of symbol A (subcarrier spacing is 15KHz) and the right edge of symbol B (subcarrier spacing is 30KHz) are aligned at the dotted line 20, there is an overlapping area of symbol B between symbol A and symbol B.
(5)、子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。(5) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,请参阅图8所示,在符号A(子载波间隔为15KHz)左侧边缘,与符号B(子载波间隔为30KHz)右侧边缘均在虚线30处对齐的情况下,符号A与符号B之间,具有符号A左侧边缘或者符号B右侧边缘的重叠区域,即虚线30所在的重叠区域。For example, please refer to Figure 8, when the left edge of symbol A (subcarrier spacing is 15KHz) and the right edge of symbol B (subcarrier spacing is 30KHz) are aligned at the dotted line 30, there is an overlapping area between symbol A and symbol B, which is the left edge of symbol A or the right edge of symbol B, that is, the overlapping area where the dotted line 30 is located.
(6)、子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。(6) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,请参阅图9所示,在符号A(子载波间隔为15KHz)右侧边缘,与符号B(子载波间隔为30KHz)左侧边缘均在虚线40处对齐的情况下,符号A与符号B之间,具有符号A右侧边缘或者符号B左侧边缘的重叠区域,即虚线40所在的重叠区域。For example, please refer to Figure 9, when the right edge of symbol A (subcarrier spacing is 15KHz) and the left edge of symbol B (subcarrier spacing is 30KHz) are aligned at the dotted line 40, there is an overlapping area between symbol A and symbol B, the right edge of symbol A or the left edge of symbol B, that is, the overlapping area where the dotted line 40 is located.
从(3)与(4)可以看出,在存在两个上行业务的情况下,若两个上行业务所在子载波间隔的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧对齐或右侧对齐,可以视为两个上行业务同时开始。
From (3) and (4), it can be seen that when there are two uplink services, if the first symbols of the channels on the frequency band with the subcarrier spacing of the two uplink services are aligned on the left or right, the two uplink services can be regarded as starting at the same time.
从(5)与(6)可以看出,若两个上行业务所在子载波间隔中,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐的情况下,虽然子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘之间相差了一个子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的符号,但是也可以视为二者是对齐的。It can be seen from (5) and (6) that if, in the subcarrier spacing where the two uplink services are located, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing, although the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing differs from the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing by a symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing, the two can also be regarded as aligned.
若两个上行业务所在子载波间隔中,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐的情况下,虽然子载波间隔小频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘之间相差了一个子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的符号,但是也可以视为二者是对齐的。If, in the subcarrier spacing where two uplink services are located, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing, although the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing differs from the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing by a symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing, the two can also be regarded as aligned.
在步骤S502中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In step S502, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,该步骤S502可以参考上述步骤S302,在此不再赘述。Here, step S502 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
通过上述技术方案,在两个所述上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,若子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,则可以确定切换模式为第一切换模式。Through the above technical solution, when the subcarrier spacings of the two frequency bands where the uplink services are located are different, if the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, it can be determined that the switching mode is the first switching mode.
图15是根据一示例性示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 15 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment, the method being executed by a user equipment, comprising the following steps:
在步骤S601中,确定承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠。In step S601, it is determined that a first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
其中,在上行业务的数量为多个,且多个上行业务所在的子载波间隔不同的情况下,承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,可以视为承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。Among them, when the number of uplink services is multiple and the subcarrier intervals of the multiple uplink services are different, the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, which can be regarded as the alignment of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services.
其中,承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠,包括以下(7)、(8)、(9)、(10)中的至少一种,以下多个上行业务是按照先后顺序排列的从不同频带发出的数据,首个上行业务可以在最后一个上行业务之前从终端发出,那么承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的符号在时域上重叠的情况下,可以认为首个上行业务与最后一个上行业务中间的承载上行业务的信道的首个符号,也是与承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号和承载最后一个上行业务的信道的符号对齐的。Among them, the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, including at least one of the following (7), (8), (9), and (10), the following multiple uplink services are data sent from different frequency bands arranged in sequence, and the first uplink service can be sent from the terminal before the last uplink service. Then, when the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service overlaps with the symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, it can be considered that the first symbol of the channel carrying the uplink service between the first uplink service and the last uplink service is also aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service and the symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
(7)、承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。(7) A left edge of a first symbol of a channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with a left edge of a first symbol of a channel carrying the last uplink service.
示例地,以多个上行业务包含第一上行业务(首个上行业务)、第二上行业务与第三上行业务(最后一个上行业务)按照先后顺序从终端发出的情况举例,在承载第一上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘与承载第三上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐的情况下,此时位于第一上行业务与第三上行业务中间的承载第二上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘也是对齐的。For example, taking the case where multiple uplink services including the first uplink service (the first uplink service), the second uplink service and the third uplink service (the last uplink service) are sent from the terminal in sequence, when the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service, then the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
(8)、承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。(8) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
示例地,以多个上行业务包含第一上行业务(首个上行业务)、第二上行业务与第三上行业务(最后一个上行业务)按照先后顺序从终端发出的情况举例,在承载第一上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘与承载第三上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐的情况下,此时位于第一上行业务与第三上行业务中间的承载第二上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘也是对齐的。For example, taking the case where multiple uplink services including the first uplink service (the first uplink service), the second uplink service and the third uplink service (the last uplink service) are sent from the terminal in sequence, when the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service, then the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
(9)、承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。(9) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
示例地,以多个上行业务包含第一上行业务(首个上行业务)、第二上行业务与第三上行业务(最后一个上行业务)按照先后顺序从终端发出的情况举例,在第一个上行业务的首个符号左侧边缘与承载第三上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐的情况下,此时位于第一上行业务与第三上行业务中间的承载第二上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘或右侧边缘也是对齐的。For example, taking the case where multiple uplink services including the first uplink service (the first uplink service), the second uplink service and the third uplink service (the last uplink service) are sent from the terminal in sequence, when the left edge of the first symbol of the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service, then the left edge or right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
(10)、承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。(10) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
示例地,以多个上行业务包含第一上行业务(首个上行业务)、第二上行业务与第三上行业务(最后一个上行业务)按照先后顺序从终端发出的情况举例,在第一个上行业务的首个符号
右侧边缘与承载第三上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐的情况下,此时位于第一上行业务与第三上行业务中间的承载第二上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘或右侧边缘也是对齐的。For example, a plurality of uplink services including a first uplink service (the first uplink service), a second uplink service and a third uplink service (the last uplink service) are sent from a terminal in sequence. When the right edge is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the third uplink service, the left edge or right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the second uplink service located between the first uplink service and the third uplink service is also aligned.
其中,由于终端能力的不同,在终端能力强的情况下,可以将承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号进行对齐,在承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐时,可以视为需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务同时开始。Among them, due to the different terminal capabilities, when the terminal capability is strong, the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services can be aligned. When the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is aligned, it can be regarded as that multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching start at the same time.
在步骤S602中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In step S602, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,该步骤S602可以参考上述步骤S302,在此不再赘述。Here, step S602 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
通过上述技术方案,在上行业务的数量为多个,多个上行业务所在的子载波间隔不同的情况下,承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠视为承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐,如此可以将上行天线切换的模式确定为第一切换模式,以便终端确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式。Through the above technical solution, when there are multiple uplink services and the subcarrier intervals of the multiple uplink services are different, the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service overlaps with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain and is regarded as the first symbol alignment of the channels carrying multiple uplink services. In this way, the uplink antenna switching mode can be determined as the first switching mode, so that the terminal determines that the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services is the first switching mode.
图16是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 16 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S701中,确定所述承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值。In step S701, it is determined that the number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
其中,承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值,被视为可以多个上行业务同时开始。If the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value, it is considered that multiple uplink services can start simultaneously.
其中,预定数值为设定的参考频带上的信道的首个符号与其余频带上的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量的阈值。The predetermined value is a threshold value of the number of symbols between the first symbol of a channel on a set reference frequency band and the first symbol of channels on other frequency bands.
其中,预定数值N由标准进行预定义,或者,由基站配置给终端,或者,由终端上报给基站。N值可以为1、2、3、4、5、6、7…,本公开在此不做限制。The predetermined value N is predefined by the standard, or configured by the base station to the terminal, or reported by the terminal to the base station. The value of N can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7..., and the present disclosure does not limit this.
其中,由于终端能力的不同,可以将承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号进行对齐,在承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐的情况下,可以视为需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务同时开始;在其他终端能力的情况下,则无需对承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号进行对齐,若承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值,也可以视为需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务同时开始。Among them, due to different terminal capabilities, the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services can be aligned. When the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services are aligned, it can be regarded that multiple uplink services requiring uplink antenna switching start at the same time; in the case of other terminal capabilities, there is no need to align the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services. If the number of symbols between the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value, it can also be regarded as that multiple uplink services requiring uplink antenna switching start at the same time.
示例地,请参阅图10所示,以多个上行业务的数量为两个为例,在两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,15KHz的频带上的信道的首个符号与30KHz的频带上的信道的首个符号之间,相距有1个15KHz的频带上的上行业务的符号,或者相距有2个30KHz的频带上的上行业务的符号,在此情况下,虽然两个符号之间相距有一些数量的符号,但是也认为两个上行业务是同时开始的。For example, please refer to Figure 10, taking the number of multiple uplink services as two as an example, when the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located is different, the first symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band and the first symbol of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band are separated by one symbol of the uplink service on the 15KHz frequency band, or are separated by two symbols of the uplink service on the 30KHz frequency band. In this case, although there is a certain number of symbols between the two symbols, it is also considered that the two uplink services start at the same time.
其中,参考频带可以具有15KHz、30KHz、60KHz、120KHz、240KHz等不同类型的子载波间隔,在确定参考频带上的信道的首个符号与其余频带上的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量的情况下,应当根据参考频带,确定承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量,即,根据参考频带确定参考频带上的信道的首个符号与其余频带上的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量。可以理解的是,参考频带由标准进行定义,或者,由基站配置给终端,或者,由终端上报给基站。Among them, the reference frequency band can have different types of subcarrier spacing such as 15KHz, 30KHz, 60KHz, 120KHz, 240KHz, etc. When determining the number of symbols between the first symbol of the channel on the reference frequency band and the first symbol of the channels on the remaining frequency bands, the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services should be determined according to the reference frequency band, that is, the number of symbols between the first symbol of the channel on the reference frequency band and the first symbol of the channels on the remaining frequency bands should be determined according to the reference frequency band. It can be understood that the reference frequency band is defined by the standard, or configured by the base station to the terminal, or reported by the terminal to the base station.
示例地,请参阅图10所示的子载波间隔为30KHz的频带与子载波间隔为15KHz的频带,若参考频带为最大子载波间隔的频带(30KHz的频带),此时15KHz的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与30KHz的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘之间,相距有2个30KHz的频带上的信道的符号。当然,图10仅是一种示例,在参考频带是子载波间隔为30KHz的频带时,两个首个符号左侧边缘之间相距的符号数量应当是至少两个。在参考频带为最大子载波间隔的频带(30KHz的频带)的情况下,预定数值N也可以以最大子载波间隔的频带作为参考来进行设置。For example, please refer to the frequency band with a subcarrier spacing of 30KHz and the frequency band with a subcarrier spacing of 15KHz shown in FIG10. If the reference frequency band is the frequency band with the maximum subcarrier spacing (the frequency band of 30KHz), at this time, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band and the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band are separated by two symbols of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band. Of course, FIG10 is only an example. When the reference frequency band is the frequency band with a subcarrier spacing of 30KHz, the number of symbols between the left edges of the two first symbols should be at least two. In the case where the reference frequency band is the frequency band with the maximum subcarrier spacing (the frequency band of 30KHz), the predetermined value N can also be set with the frequency band with the maximum subcarrier spacing as a reference.
示例地,请参阅图10所示,若参考频带为最小子载波间隔的频带(15KHz的频带),此时15KHz的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与30KHz的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘之间,相距有1个15KHz的频带上的信道的符号。当然,图10仅是一种示例,在参考频带是子载波间隔为15KHz时,两个首个符号左侧边缘之间相距的符号数量应当是至少一个。在参考频带为最小子载波间隔的频带(15KHz的频带)的情况下,预定数值N也可以以最小子载波间隔的频带作为参考来进行设置。For example, please refer to FIG10. If the reference frequency band is a frequency band with the minimum subcarrier spacing (a frequency band of 15KHz), the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band and the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the 30KHz frequency band are separated by one symbol of the channel on the 15KHz frequency band. Of course, FIG10 is only an example. When the reference frequency band is a frequency band with a subcarrier spacing of 15KHz, the number of symbols between the left edges of the two first symbols should be at least one. In the case where the reference frequency band is a frequency band with the minimum subcarrier spacing (a frequency band of 15KHz), the predetermined value N can also be set with the frequency band with the minimum subcarrier spacing as a reference.
其中,上述提到的最大子载波间隔对应的频带,在所有频带只有两个的时候,也可以称为
子载波间隔大对应的频带。上述提到的最小子载波间隔对应的频带,在所有频带只有两个的时候,也可以称为子载波间隔小对应的频带。Among them, the frequency band corresponding to the maximum subcarrier spacing mentioned above can also be called when there are only two frequency bands in all frequency bands. The frequency band corresponding to the large subcarrier spacing. The frequency band corresponding to the minimum subcarrier spacing mentioned above can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the small subcarrier spacing when there are only two frequency bands.
其中,参考频带还可以设置为最高频点对应的频带,当所有频带只有两个的时候,最高频点对应的频带也可以被称为较高频点对应的频带。参考频带还可以设置为最低频点对应的频带,当所有频带只有两个的时候,最低频点对应的频带也可以被称为较低频点对应的频带。The reference frequency band may also be set to the frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point may also be referred to as the frequency band corresponding to the higher frequency point. The reference frequency band may also be set to the frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point may also be referred to as the frequency band corresponding to the lower frequency point.
在步骤S702中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In step S702, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,以预定数值为N举例,在所述承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于N的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。Among them, taking the predetermined value N as an example, when the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to N, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode.
其中,该步骤S702可以参考上述步骤S302,在此不再赘述。Here, step S702 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
通过上述技术方案,可以在承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值的符号的情况下,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式,以便终端更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。Through the above technical solution, when the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value of symbols, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
图17是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 17 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S801中,确定承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐,且承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值。In step S801, it is determined that the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are aligned, and the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
其中,确定承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐,且承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值,可以被视为多个上行业务同时开始。Among them, determining that the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are aligned and the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value can be regarded as the simultaneous start of multiple uplink services.
其中,承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐可以参考上述步骤S401,在此不再赘述;所述承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值可以参考上述步骤S701,在此不再赘述。Among them, the alignment of the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple uplink services can refer to the above-mentioned step S401, which will not be repeated here; the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channel carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to the predetermined value, which can refer to the above-mentioned step S701, which will not be repeated here.
在步骤S802中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式。In step S802, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,该步骤S802可以参考上述步骤S302,在此不再赘述。Here, step S802 may refer to the above step S302 and will not be described in detail here.
通过上述技术方案,可以在承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐,且所述承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值的情况下,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式,以便终端更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。。Through the above technical solution, when the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are aligned and the number of symbols between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
图18是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 18 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S901中,确定多个上行业务不同时开始。In step S901, it is determined that a plurality of uplink services are not started at the same time.
其中,多个上行业务不同时开始包括以下至少一种:The multiple uplink services not starting at the same time include at least one of the following:
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐;The first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned;
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量大于预定数值。The number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
在步骤S902中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。In step S902, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
其中,第二切换模式包括以下至少一种:用户设备执行多次上行天线切换、用户设备基于多个切换间隙执行上行天线切换、用户设备执行上行天线切换的频带对的切换间隙是独立的、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换使用的切换间隙是独立的。Among them, the second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for the multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
其中,在需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务同时开始的情况下,如果将多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换模式确定为第二切换模式,会导致终端需要确定多次切换间隙,而多个上行业余同时开始仅需确定一次切换间隙即可,多次切换间隙的确定会导致终端计算资源的浪费。Among them, when multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching start at the same time, if the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined as the second switching mode, the terminal will need to determine multiple switching gaps, while if multiple uplink services start at the same time, only one switching gap needs to be determined. The determination of multiple switching gaps will result in a waste of terminal computing resources.
示例地,请参阅图4所示,图4中的DCI1、DCI0分别位于band A、band B上,上行业务PUSCH1、PUSCH0分别位于band C、band D上,且PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置相同,均为T0,两个上行业务同时开始,N1为终端将上行天线从band A切换至band C所需的时间,N2为终端将上行天线从band B切换至band D的时间。For example, please refer to Figure 4, in which DCI1 and DCI0 are located on band A and band B respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D respectively, and the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are the same, both are T 0 , and the two uplink services start at the same time, N1 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C, and N2 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D.
在两个上行业务同时开始的情况下,说明上行天线在两组频带对上真正所需的切换间隙是相同的,此时若确定切换模式为第二切换模式,采用两次切换间隙来分别对两个上行天线进行切换,被计算的数据量较少,与终端分配的计算资源之间并不匹配,这无疑占用了终端多余的计算资源。When two uplink services start at the same time, it means that the switching gaps actually required for the uplink antennas on the two frequency band pairs are the same. At this time, if the switching mode is determined to be the second switching mode, two switching gaps are used to switch the two uplink antennas respectively. The amount of data calculated is small, which does not match the computing resources allocated by the terminal, which undoubtedly occupies excess computing resources of the terminal.
为了减少终端计算资源的浪费,本公开提出在要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务不同时开始的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。
In order to reduce the waste of terminal computing resources, the present disclosure proposes that when multiple uplink services for which uplink antenna switching is to be performed do not start at the same time, the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode.
示例地,请参阅图5所示,图5中的DCI1、DCI0分别位于band A、band B上,上行业务PUSCH1、PUSCH0分别位于band C、band D上,且PUSCH1、PUSCH0这两个上行业务的起始位置不同,PUSCH1的起始位置为T0,2,PUSCH0的起始位置为T0,1,即两个上行业务不同时开始,N1为终端将上行天线从band A切换至band C所需的时间,N2为终端将上行天线从band B切换至band D的时间。For example, please refer to Figure 5, where DCI1 and DCI0 in Figure 5 are located on band A and band B, respectively, and uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are located on band C and band D, respectively, and the starting positions of the two uplink services PUSCH1 and PUSCH0 are different, the starting position of PUSCH1 is T 0,2 , and the starting position of PUSCH0 is T 0,1 , that is, the two uplink services do not start at the same time, N1 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band A to band C, and N2 is the time required for the terminal to switch the uplink antenna from band B to band D.
在两个上行业务不同时开始的情况下,上行天线在band A与band C频带对上真正所需的切换间隙是N1,在band B与band D频带对上真正所需的切换间隙是N2,二者真正所需的切换间隙是不同的,此时将切换模式确定为第二切换模式,采用两次切换间隙来分别对两个上行天线进行切换,被计算的数据量更多,能够与终端分配的计算资源之间相互匹配,会使得终端的计算资源得到充分利用,并不会存在计算资源的浪费。并且,上行天线在band A与band C频带对上的切换间隙,并不会影响到上行天线在band B与band D频带对上的切换间隙,二者相互独立,在band B与band D频带对之间经过切换间隙N2之后,基站就可以立即调度band B与band D,而无需经历完N1才调度band B与band D。In the case where the two uplink services are not started at the same time, the switching gap actually required for the uplink antenna on the band A and band C frequency pair is N1, and the switching gap actually required for the band B and band D frequency pair is N2. The switching gaps actually required for the two are different. At this time, the switching mode is determined to be the second switching mode, and two switching gaps are used to switch the two uplink antennas respectively. The amount of data calculated is larger, which can match the computing resources allocated by the terminal, so that the computing resources of the terminal are fully utilized and there is no waste of computing resources. In addition, the switching gap between the uplink antenna on the band A and band C frequency pair does not affect the switching gap between the uplink antenna on the band B and band D frequency pair. The two are independent of each other. After the switching gap N2 between the band B and band D frequency pair, the base station can immediately schedule band B and band D without having to wait until N1 to schedule band B and band D.
通过上述方案,在需要进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务不同时开始的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。一方面可以使得终端的计算资源与被计算的数据相互匹配,终端的计算资源得到充分利用,并不会存在计算资源的浪费;另一方面在多个上行业务不同时开始的情况下,采用多个切换间隙来分别对多根上行天线来进行切换,也使得多个上行天线的切换过程相互独立,基站能够及时地调度被释放的频带。Through the above scheme, when multiple uplink services that require uplink antenna switching do not start at the same time, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode. On the one hand, the computing resources of the terminal can be matched with the calculated data, and the computing resources of the terminal can be fully utilized without wasting computing resources; on the other hand, when multiple uplink services do not start at the same time, multiple switching gaps are used to switch multiple uplink antennas respectively, which also makes the switching processes of multiple uplink antennas independent of each other, and the base station can schedule the released frequency band in time.
图19是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 19 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1001中,确定承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐,和/或承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的数量大于预定数值。In step S1001, it is determined that the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned, and/or the number of intervals between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
其中,确定承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐,和/或承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的数量大于预定数值可以被视为多个上行业务不同时开始。Determining that the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned and/or the number of intervals between the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value can be regarded as that the multiple uplink services do not start at the same time.
在一些实施方式中,承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐包括以下至少一种:In some implementations, the first symbol of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services is not aligned, including at least one of the following:
在多个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔相同的情况下,承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠,则被视为承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐。When the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located is the same, if the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services do not overlap in the time domain, it is regarded that the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned.
在上行业务的数量为两个,且两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠,被视为承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐。When the number of uplink services is two and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located are different, the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, and is regarded as the first symbol of the channel carrying the multiple uplink services is not aligned.
在上行业务的数量为多个,且多个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠,可以被视为承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐。When there are multiple uplink services and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the multiple uplink services are located are different, the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, which can be regarded as the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned.
其中,在多个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔相同的情况下,承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠,包括以下(1)、(2)中的至少一种:Wherein, when the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where multiple uplink services are located is the same, the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services do not overlap in the time domain, including at least one of the following (1) and (2):
(1)、承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐,可以视为承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐。(1) The left edges of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned, which can be regarded as the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned.
(2)、承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐,可以视为承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐。(2) The right edges of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned, which can be regarded as the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are aligned.
可以理解的是,本公开任意实施例提出的多个,可以理解为包括两个及两个以上。It can be understood that any multiple embodiments of the present disclosure may be understood to include two or more.
在一些实施方式中,以预定数值为N举例,在所述承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量大于N的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。可以理解的是,预定数值为设定的参考频带上的信道的首个符号与其余频带上的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量的阈值。In some implementations, taking the predetermined value as N as an example, when the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services is greater than N, it is determined that the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is the second switching mode. It can be understood that the predetermined value is a threshold value of the number of symbols spaced between the first symbol of the channel on the reference frequency band and the first symbol of the channel on the remaining frequency bands.
其中,预定数值N由标准进行预定义,或者,由基站配置给终端,或者,由终端上报给基站。The predetermined value N is predefined by a standard, or configured by a base station to a terminal, or reported by a terminal to a base station.
其中,承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量根据参考频带定义,参考频点或者由标准进行定义,或者,由基站配置给终端,或者,由终端上报给基站。The number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of channels carrying multiple uplink services is defined according to a reference frequency band. The reference frequency point is either defined by a standard, or configured by a base station to a terminal, or reported by a terminal to a base station.
其中,参考频带可以是最大子载波间隔对应的频带,或者最小子载波间隔对应的频带,或者最高频点对应的频带,或者最低频点对应的频带。所述最大子载波间隔对应的频带,在所有
频带只有两个的时候,也可以称为子载波间隔大对应的频带。所述最小子载波间隔对应的频带,在所有频带只有两个的时候,也可以称为子载波间隔小对应的频带。当所有频带只有两个的时候,最高频点对应的频带也可以被称为较高频点对应的频带。当所有频带只有两个的时候,最低频点对应的频带也可以被称为较低频点对应的频带。The reference frequency band may be a frequency band corresponding to the maximum subcarrier spacing, or a frequency band corresponding to the minimum subcarrier spacing, or a frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point, or a frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point. The frequency band corresponding to the maximum subcarrier spacing is When there are only two frequency bands, it can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the large subcarrier spacing. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the minimum subcarrier spacing can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the small subcarrier spacing. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the highest frequency point can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the higher frequency point. When there are only two frequency bands, the frequency band corresponding to the lowest frequency point can also be called the frequency band corresponding to the lower frequency point.
在步骤S1002中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式。In step S1002, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
其中,第二切换模式包括以下至少一种:用户设备执行多次上行天线切换、用户设备基于多个切换间隙执行上行天线切换、用户设备执行上行天线切换的频带对的切换间隙是独立的、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换使用的切换间隙是独立的。Among them, the second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for the multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
其中,该步骤S1002请参见上述步骤S902,在此不再赘述。Among them, the step S1002 refers to the above-mentioned step S902 and will not be repeated here.
通过上述技术方案,可以在承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐与承载多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的数量大于预定数值中的至少一种存在的情况下,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式。Through the above technical solution, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services can be determined as the second switching mode when at least one of the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services are not aligned and the number of intervals between the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
图20是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 20 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1101中,确定承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠。In step S1101, it is determined that a first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services does not overlap with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
其中,两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠,包括以下至少一种:Among them, when the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located are different, the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, including at least one of the following:
两个子载波间隔中,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐;In the two subcarrier spacings, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing;
两个子载波间隔中,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐;In two subcarrier spacings, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing;
两个子载波间隔中,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐;In the two subcarrier spacings, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing;
两个子载波间隔中,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。In the two subcarrier spacings, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a larger subcarrier spacing.
在步骤S1102中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。In step S1102, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
其中,该步骤S1002请参见上述步骤S902,在此不再赘述。Among them, the step S1002 refers to the above-mentioned step S902 and will not be repeated here.
通过上述技术方案,在两个所述上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,若子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠,则可以确定切换模式为第二切换模式。Through the above technical solution, when the subcarrier spacings of the two frequency bands where the uplink services are located are different, if the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, it can be determined that the switching mode is the second switching mode.
图21是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 21 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1201中,确定承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠。In step S1201, it is determined that a first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services does not overlap with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
其中,承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上不重叠,包括以下至少一种:The first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service among the multiple uplink services does not overlap with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service in the time domain, including at least one of the following:
多个上行业务中,承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐;Among multiple uplink services, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
多个上行业务中,承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐;Among multiple uplink services, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
多个上行业务中,承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐;Among multiple uplink services, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
多个上行业务中,承载首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。Among multiple uplink services, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
在步骤S1202中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式。In step S1202, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
通过上述技术方案,在承载多个上行业务中的首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号的情况下,确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式。Through the above technical solution, when the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service among multiple uplink services and the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service are used, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode.
图22是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备
执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is performed by a user equipment Execution, including the following steps:
在步骤S1301中,确定多个下行控制信息对齐。In step S1301, it is determined whether multiple downlink control information are aligned.
其中,调度多个上行业务的多个下行控制信息对齐,包括以下(13、(14)、(15)中的至少一种:The aligning of multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services includes at least one of the following (13, (14), and (15):
(13)、在多个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔相同的情况下,若存在以下至少一者的情况,被视为多个下行控制信息对齐:(13) When the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where multiple downlink control information are located is the same, if at least one of the following conditions exists, the multiple downlink control information is regarded as aligned:
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐;Aligning the first symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐;Aligning the last symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐;The last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐。A first symbol of a channel carrying first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying last downlink control information.
(14)、在多个上行业务为两个,且两个所述多个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,若存在以下情况,被视为多个下行控制信息对齐:(14) When there are two uplink services and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two multiple downlink control information are located are different, if the following conditions exist, the multiple downlink control information are regarded as aligned:
子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上重叠。其中,所述第一符号为子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing. The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
(15)、在多个上行业务为多个,且多个所述多个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,若存在以下情况,被视为多个下行控制信息对齐:(15) When there are multiple uplink services and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the multiple downlink control information are located are different, if the following conditions exist, the multiple downlink control information are regarded as aligned:
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号对齐。其中,第三符号为承载首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information, wherein the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
可以理解的是,本公开任意实施例提出的承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号,可以为下行控制信息占据的物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)的首个符号或最后一个符号。It can be understood that the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information proposed in any embodiment of the present disclosure may be the first symbol or the last symbol of the physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) occupied by the downlink control information.
在步骤S1302中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式。In step S1302, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,第一切换模式包括以下至少一种:用户设备执行一次上行天线切换、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换被视为一次、用户设备基于一个切换间隙执行上行天线切换、用户设备执行上行天线切换的频带对共享一个切换间隙、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换共享一个切换间隙。Among them, the first switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch once, multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment are regarded as one, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on a switching gap, the frequency band pair for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching shares a switching gap, and multiple uplink antenna switches performed by the user equipment share a switching gap.
通过上述技术方案,调度多个上行业务的多个下行控制信息对齐的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。第一方面,由于本公开是在多个下行控制信息的情况下,将上行天线的切换模式确定为第一切换模式,而非是在多个下行控制信息不对齐的情况下,将上行天线的切换模式确定为第一切换模式,所以多个上行天线实际所需的切换间隙是一致的,基于一致的切换间隙来对多个上行天线进行切换,也能够避免基站无法及时地在部分频带调度上行传输的情况发生。第二方面,对于第一切换模式而言,终端仅需确定一个切换间隙,其确定逻辑较为简单,对终端的要求相对较低。第三方面,协议也无需定义多个上行天线切换的参考点,降低了协议的复杂度。Through the above technical solution, when multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services are aligned, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode. On the one hand, since the present disclosure determines the uplink antenna switching mode as the first switching mode when there are multiple downlink control information, rather than determining the uplink antenna switching mode as the first switching mode when multiple downlink control information are not aligned, the switching gaps actually required for multiple uplink antennas are consistent, and multiple uplink antennas are switched based on consistent switching gaps, which can also avoid the situation where the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission in some frequency bands in a timely manner. On the other hand, for the first switching mode, the terminal only needs to determine one switching gap, and its determination logic is relatively simple, and the requirements for the terminal are relatively low. On the third hand, the protocol does not need to define reference points for switching multiple uplink antennas, which reduces the complexity of the protocol.
图23是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 23 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1401中,确定多个两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔相同,且存在以下至少一种情况:In step S1401, it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where two or more pieces of downlink control information are located are the same, and at least one of the following situations exists:
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐;Aligning the first symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐;Aligning the last symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐;The last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐。A first symbol of a channel carrying first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying last downlink control information.
其中,以上四种情况均可以被视为多个下行控制信息对齐。
Among them, the above four situations can all be regarded as alignment of multiple downlink control information.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐,包括(16)与(17)中的至少一种:In some implementations, the first symbol alignment of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information includes at least one of (16) and (17):
(16)、承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。(16) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(17)、承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。(17) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐,包括(18)与(19)中的至少一种:In some implementations, the last symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned, including at least one of (18) and (19):
(18)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐。(18) The last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(19)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐。(19) The last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个时域符右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the last time domain symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol carrying the last downlink control information.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道中的首个下行控制信息的最后一个符号与最后一个下行控制信息的首个符号对齐,包括(20)、(21)、(22)、(23)中的至少一种:In some implementations, the last symbol of the first downlink control information in the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the last downlink control information, including at least one of (20), (21), (22), and (23):
(20)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。(20) The left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(21)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。(21) The right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(22)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。(22) The left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(23)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。(23) The right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道中的首个下行控制信息的首个符号与最后一个下行控制信息的最后一个符号对齐,包括(24)、(25)、(26)、(27)中的至少一种:In some implementations, the first symbol of the first downlink control information in the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned with the last symbol of the last downlink control information, including at least one of (24), (25), (26), and (27):
(24)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。(24) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(25)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。(25) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(26)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。(26) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(27)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。(27) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在步骤S1402中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In step S1402, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
该步骤请参考上述步骤S302,在此不再赘述。Please refer to the above step S302 for this step, which will not be described again here.
通过上述技术方案,在多个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔相同的情况下,若存在承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐;承载多个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐;承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号对齐;承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号对齐中的至少一种的情况下,确定调度多个上行业务的多个下行控制信息对齐,此时可以确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。Through the above technical scheme, when the subcarrier spacing of the frequency band where multiple downlink control information are located is the same, if there is at least one of the following: the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned; the last symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is aligned; the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information; the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information, it is determined that the multiple downlink control information scheduling the multiple uplink services are aligned, and at this time, it can be determined that the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is the first switching mode.
图24是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 24 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1501中,确定两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频
带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上重叠;所述第一符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。In step S1501, it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two downlink control information are located are different, and the frequency band with the smaller subcarrier spacing has the smaller subcarrier spacing. The first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing; the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
其中,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上重叠,可以被视为多个下行控制信息对齐。Among them, the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing in the time domain, which can be regarded as alignment of multiple downlink control information.
其中,所述第一符号为所述子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
其中,在存在以下(28)、(29)、(30)、(31)中的至少一种的情况下,确定子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上重叠。In which, in the presence of at least one of the following (28), (29), (30), and (31), it is determined that the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on a frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on a frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
(28)、所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘对齐。(28) The left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
(29)、所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘对齐。(29) The right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
(30)、所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘对齐。(30) The left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
(31)、所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘对齐。(31) The right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
在步骤S1502中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式。In step S1502, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,该步骤S1602请参见上述步骤S302,在此不再赘述。Among them, the step S1602 refers to the above-mentioned step S302 and will not be repeated here.
通过上述技术方案,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载
波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的第二符号在时域上重叠的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式,以便终端更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。Through the above technical solution, the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is When the second symbols carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a large inter-wavelength interval overlap in the time domain, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
图25是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 25 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1601中,确定承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上重叠;所述第三符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。In step S1601, it is determined that the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information overlaps with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
其中,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的第四符号在时域上重叠,可以被视为多个下行控制信令对齐。The third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information overlaps with the fourth symbol carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain, which can be regarded as alignment of multiple downlink control signaling.
其中,所述第三符号为承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
其中,存在以下(32)、(33)、(34)、(35)中的至少一种的情况下,确定承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上重叠。In which, when at least one of the following (32), (33), (34), and (35) exists, it is determined that the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information overlaps with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain.
(32)、所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘对齐。(32) The left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。By way of example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。By way of example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left side of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧对齐。By way of example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(33)、所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘对齐。(33) The right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。By way of example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。By way of example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(34)、所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘对齐。(34) The left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。By way of example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘对齐。By way of example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(35)、所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘对齐。(35) The right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中所述首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。By way of example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧对齐。By way of example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧对齐。
By way of example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在步骤S1602中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式。In step S1602, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,该步骤S1602请参考上述步骤S902,在此不再赘述。Among them, please refer to the above-mentioned step S902 for step S1602, which will not be repeated here.
通过上述技术方案,可以在承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上重叠的情况下,确定切换模式为第一切换模式,以便终端更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。Through the above technical solution, when the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information overlaps with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain, the switching mode can be determined to be the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
图26是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 26 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1701中,确定多个下行控制信息不对齐。In step S1701, it is determined that a plurality of downlink control information are not aligned.
其中,调度多个上行业务的多个下行控制信息不对齐,包括(36)、(37)、(38)中的至少一种:The multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services are not aligned, including at least one of (36), (37), and (38):
(36)、在多个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔相同的情况下,若存在以下至少一者的情况,被视为多个下行控制信息不对齐:(36) When the subcarrier spacing of the frequency bands where multiple downlink control information are located is the same, if at least one of the following situations exists, the multiple downlink control information is regarded as not aligned:
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号不对齐;The first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned;
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号不对齐;The last symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号不对齐;The last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号不对齐。A first symbol of a channel carrying a first downlink control information among a plurality of downlink control information is not aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying a last downlink control information.
(37)、在多个上行业务为两个,且两个所述多个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,若存在以下情况,被视为多个下行控制信息不对齐:(37) When there are two uplink services and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two multiple downlink control information are located are different, if the following conditions exist, the multiple downlink control information are regarded as not aligned:
子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上不重叠。其中,所述第一符号为子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing in the time domain. The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
(38)、在多个上行业务为多个,且多个所述多个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同的情况下,若存在以下情况,被视为多个下行控制信息不对齐:(38) When there are multiple uplink services and the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the multiple downlink control information are located are different, if the following conditions exist, the multiple downlink control information are regarded as not aligned:
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号不对齐。其中,第三符号为承载首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information. The third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在步骤S1702中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。In step S1702, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
其中,第二切换模式包括以下至少一种:用户设备执行多次上行天线切换、用户设备基于多个切换间隙执行上行天线切换、用户设备执行上行天线切换的频带对的切换间隙是独立的、用户设备执行的多次上行天线切换使用的切换间隙是独立的。Among them, the second switching mode includes at least one of the following: the user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps, the switching gaps of the frequency band pairs for the user equipment to perform uplink antenna switching are independent, and the switching gaps used for the multiple uplink antenna switching performed by the user equipment are independent.
其中,该步骤S1702请参照上述步骤S902,在此不再赘述。Among them, please refer to the above-mentioned step S902 for step S1702, which will not be repeated here.
通过上述技术方案,在多个下行控制信息不对齐的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。一方面可以使得终端的计算资源与被计算的数据相互匹配,终端的计算资源得到充分利用,并不会存在计算资源的浪费;另一方面在多个下行控制信息不对齐的情况下,采用多个切换间隙来分别对多根上行天线来进行切换,也使得多个上行天线的切换过程相互独立,基站能够及时地调度被释放的频带。Through the above technical solution, when multiple downlink control information is not aligned, the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode. On the one hand, the computing resources of the terminal can be matched with the calculated data, and the computing resources of the terminal can be fully utilized without wasting computing resources; on the other hand, when multiple downlink control information is not aligned, multiple switching gaps are used to switch multiple uplink antennas respectively, which also makes the switching processes of multiple uplink antennas independent of each other, and the base station can schedule the released frequency band in time.
图27是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 27 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1801中,确定多个两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔相同,且存在以下至少一种情况:In step S1801, it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where two or more pieces of downlink control information are located are the same, and at least one of the following situations exists:
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号不对齐;The first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned;
承载多个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号不对齐;The last symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号不对齐;The last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information;
承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号不对齐。A first symbol of a channel carrying a first downlink control information among a plurality of downlink control information is not aligned with a last symbol of a channel carrying a last downlink control information.
其中,以上四种情况均可以被视为多个下行控制信息不对齐。
Among them, the above four situations can all be regarded as multiple downlink control information are not aligned.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号不对齐,包括(39)与(40)中的至少一种:In some implementations, the first symbols of the channels carrying multiple downlink control information are not aligned, including at least one of (39) and (40):
(39)、承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。(39) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(40)、承载多个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。(40) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号不对齐,包括(41)与(42)中的至少一种:In some implementations, the last symbol of a channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned, including at least one of (41) and (42):
(41)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号不对齐。(41) The last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(42)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号不对齐。(42) The last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个时域符右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last time domain symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol carrying the last downlink control information.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道中的首个下行控制信息的最后一个符号与最后一个下行控制信息的首个符号不对齐,包括(43)、(44)、(45)、(46)中的至少一种:In some implementations, the last symbol of the first downlink control information in the channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the first symbol of the last downlink control information, including at least one of (43), (44), (45), and (46):
(43)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。(43) The left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(44)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。(44) The right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(45)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。(45) The left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(46)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。(46) The right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在一些实施方式中,承载多个下行控制信息的信道中的首个下行控制信息的首个符号与最后一个下行控制信息的最后一个符号不对齐,包括(47)、(48)、(49)、(50)中的至少一种:In some implementations, a first symbol of a first downlink control information in a channel carrying multiple downlink control information is not aligned with a last symbol of a last downlink control information, including at least one of (47), (48), (49), and (50):
(47)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。(47) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(48)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。(48) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(49)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。(49) The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(50)、承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。(50) The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在步骤S1802中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式。In step S1802, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
该步骤请参考上述步骤S902,在此不再赘述。Please refer to the above step S902 for this step, which will not be described again here.
通过上述技术方案,在调度多个上行业务的多个下行控制信息不对齐的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。一方面可以使得终端的计算资源与被计算的数据相互匹配,终端的计算资源得到充分利用,并不会存在计算资源的浪费;另一方面在多个下行控制信息不对齐的情况下,采用多个切换间隙来分别对多根上行天线来进行切换,也使得多个上行天线的切换过程相互独立,基站能够及时地调度被释放的频带。Through the above technical solution, when multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services are not aligned, the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is determined to be the second switching mode. On the one hand, the computing resources of the terminal can be matched with the calculated data, and the computing resources of the terminal can be fully utilized without wasting computing resources; on the other hand, when multiple downlink control information are not aligned, multiple switching gaps are used to switch multiple uplink antennas respectively, which also makes the switching processes of multiple uplink antennas independent of each other, and the base station can schedule the released frequency band in time.
图28是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 28 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is performed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S1901中,确定两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上不重叠;所述第一符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为首个
符号或最后一个符号。In step S1901, it is determined that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two downlink control information are located are different, and the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap with the second symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain; the first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
其中,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上不重叠,可以被视为多个下行控制信息不对齐。Among them, the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing and the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing do not overlap in the time domain, which can be regarded as multiple downlink control information are not aligned.
其中,所述第一符号为所述子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
其中,在存在以下(51)、(52)、(53)、(54)中的至少一种的情况下,确定子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上不重叠。In which, in the presence of at least one of the following (51), (52), (53), and (54), it is determined that the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on a frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on a frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
(51)、所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘不对齐。(51) The left edge of the first symbol is not aligned with the left edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
(52)、所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘不对齐。(52) The right edge of the first symbol is not aligned with the right edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
(53)、所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘不对齐。(53) The left edge of the first symbol is not aligned with the right edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
(54)、所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘不对齐。(54) The right edge of the first symbol is not aligned with the left edge of the second symbol.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
示例地,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与所述子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing.
在步骤S1902中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式。In step S1902, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
其中,该步骤S1902请参见上述步骤S902,在此不再赘述。Among them, the step S1902 refers to the above step S902 and will not be repeated here.
通过上述技术方案,两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的
第二符号在时域上不重叠的情况下,确定所述多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。Through the above technical solution, the subcarrier spacing of the two frequency bands where the downlink control information is located is different, and the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is different from the first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing. When the second symbols do not overlap in the time domain, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by the multiple uplink services is the second switching mode.
图29是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 29 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S2001中,确定承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上不重叠;所述第三符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。In step S2001, it is determined that the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
其中,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的第四符号在时域上不重叠,可以被视为多个下行控制信令不对齐。The third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain, which can be regarded as the multiple downlink control signalings are not aligned.
其中,所述第三符号为承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的的首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号或最后一个符号。The third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol of a channel carrying the last downlink control information.
其中,存在以下(55)、(56)、(57)、(58)中的至少一种的情况下,确定承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上不重叠。In which, when at least one of the following (55), (56), (57), and (58) exists, it is determined that the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain.
(55)、所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘不对齐。(55) The left edge of the third symbol is not aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(56)、所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘不对齐。(56) The right edge of the third symbol is not aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(57)、所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘不对齐。(57) The left edge of the third symbol is not aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘不对齐。For example, the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
(58)、所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘不对齐。(58) The right edge of the third symbol is not aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中所述首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧边缘不对齐。By way of example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧边缘不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号左侧不对齐。For example, the right edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
示例地,承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的最后一个符号左侧不对齐。
For example, the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among the multiple downlink control information is not aligned with the left edge of the last symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information.
在步骤S2002中,确定上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式。In step S2002, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
其中,该步骤S2002可以参考上述步骤S902,在此不再赘述。Among them, step S2002 can refer to the above-mentioned step S902 and will not be repeated here.
通过上述技术方案,可以在承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上不重叠的情况下,确定切换模式为第二切换模式,以便终端更好地选择上行天线切换的模式。Through the above technical solution, the switching mode can be determined to be the second switching mode when the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain, so that the terminal can better select the uplink antenna switching mode.
图30是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG30 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S2101中,确定所述多个上行业务的下行控制信息为同一下行控制信息。In step S2101, it is determined that the downlink control information of the multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information.
在步骤S2102中,确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In step S2102, it is determined that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
其中,在调度多个上行业务的下行控制信息为同一下行控制信息,或者调度多个上行业务的多个下行控制信息被视为同一下行控制信息的情况下,可以确定多个上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。In which, when the downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information, or multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services are regarded as the same downlink control information, the mode of switching multiple uplink antennas can be determined to be the first switching mode.
可以理解的是,一个下行控制信息可以调度多个上行业务,因此在调度多个上行业务的下行控制信息为同一下行控制信息的情况下,可以确定多个上行业务触发的上行天线切换为第一切换模式。It is understandable that one downlink control information can schedule multiple uplink services. Therefore, when the downlink control information scheduling multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information, it can be determined that the uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink services is the first switching mode.
通过上述技术方案,在调度多个上行业务的下行控制信息为同一下行控制信息,或者调度多个上行业务的多个下行控制信息被视为同一下行控制信息的情况下,可以确定多个上下行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式,以便终端更好地选择上行天线的切换模式。Through the above technical solution, when the downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information, or multiple downlink control information for scheduling multiple uplink services are regarded as the same downlink control information, the uplink antenna switching mode triggered by multiple uplink and downlink services can be determined to be the first switching mode, so that the terminal can better select the switching mode of the uplink antenna.
图31是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 31 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S2201中,在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,所述用户设备不期望网络设备在目标频带上进行上行传输调度,所述目标频带为不与所述上行业务所在的频带并发的频带,和/或不与所述下行控制信息所在的频带并发的频带。In step S2201, during the process of switching the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on the target frequency band, and the target frequency band is a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the uplink service is located, and/or a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the downlink control information is located.
其中,标准支持为每个频带配置相关频带,频带支持与相关频带并发,当频带处于切换状态下,基站虽然无法在频带上调度上行传输,但是却可以在相关频带上调度上行传输;当然,频带也可以不配置相关频带,不支持与任何频带并发,当频带处于切换状态下,基站无法在频带上调度上行传输,也无法在任何频带上调度上行传输。Among them, the standard supports configuring related frequency bands for each frequency band, and the frequency band supports concurrency with related frequency bands. When the frequency band is in a switching state, although the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on the frequency band, it can schedule uplink transmission on the related frequency band; of course, the frequency band can also be not configured with related frequency bands, and does not support concurrency with any frequency band. When the frequency band is in a switching state, the base station cannot schedule uplink transmission on the frequency band, nor can it schedule uplink transmission on any frequency band.
可以理解的是,当频带不支持与任何频带并发的情况下,目标频带则是任何频带;当频带不支持与部分频带并发的情况下,目标频带则是部分频带。It can be understood that when the frequency band does not support concurrency with any frequency band, the target frequency band is any frequency band; when the frequency band does not support concurrency with some frequency bands, the target frequency band is some frequency bands.
示例地,以终端支持band A、band B、band C、band D四个频带为例,若band C不与任何频带并发或者band C并未被配置任何相关频带,两根上行天线切换前分别在Band A、band B上,两个上行天线切换后在band C上的情况下,终端不期望基站在band D上进行上行传输调度。For example, taking the terminal supporting four frequency bands, band A, band B, band C, and band D, if band C is not concurrent with any frequency band or band C is not configured with any related frequency bands, and the two uplink antennas are on Band A and band B respectively before switching, and are on band C after switching, the terminal does not expect the base station to perform uplink transmission scheduling on band D.
可以理解的是,band A、band B、band C在切换状态下,终端也并不期望基站在band A、band B、band C上调度上行传输,以避免上行天线在不同的频带之间切换的过程错误。It is understandable that when band A, band B, and band C are in the switching state, the terminal does not expect the base station to schedule uplink transmission on band A, band B, and band C to avoid errors in the process of uplink antenna switching between different frequency bands.
通过上述技术方案,在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,若上行业务所在的频带不支持与目标频带并发,或者下行控制信息所在的频带不支持与目标频带并发,用户设备则不期望网络设备在目标频带上进行上行传输调度。Through the above technical solution, in the process of switching the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, if the frequency band where the uplink service is located does not support concurrency with the target frequency band, or the frequency band where the downlink control information is located does not support concurrency with the target frequency band, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on the target frequency band.
图32是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由用户设备执行,包括以下步骤:FIG. 32 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a user equipment and includes the following steps:
在步骤S2301中,在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,所述用户设备不期望网络设备在任何频带上进行上行传输调度,其中,所述下行控制信息所在的频带不与任何频带并发。In step S2301, when the uplink antenna switches from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band, wherein the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is not concurrent with any frequency band.
其中,在频带不支持与任何频带并发的情况下,终端则不期望网络设备在任何频带上进行上行传输调度。In the case where the frequency band does not support concurrency with any frequency band, the terminal does not expect the network device to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band.
通过上述技术方案,在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,若上行业务所在的频带不支持与任何频带并发,或者下行控制信息所在的频带不支持与任何频带并发,用户设备则不期望网络设备在任何频带上进行上行传输调度。Through the above technical solution, in the process of switching the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, if the frequency band where the uplink service is located does not support concurrency with any frequency band, or the frequency band where the downlink control information is located does not support concurrency with any frequency band, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band.
图33是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,该方法由网络设备执行,包括以下步骤:
FIG. 33 is a method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The method is executed by a network device and includes the following steps:
在步骤S2401中,在网络设备存在多个切换间隙时,确定所述网络设备按照最大切换间隙进行切换。In step S2401, when a network device has multiple switching gaps, it is determined that the network device is switched according to the maximum switching gap.
其中,切换间隙也可以称为切换路径,若基站假设终端按照最小切换间隙来进行切换时,会出现基站已经开始调度终端的上行业务,但是终端的上行业务还未切换到上行业务所应在的频带上。The switching gap may also be called a switching path. If the base station assumes that the terminal switches according to the minimum switching gap, the base station may start scheduling the uplink service of the terminal, but the uplink service of the terminal has not yet been switched to the frequency band where the uplink service should be located.
示例地,两根上行天线的初始状态在band A与band B,两根上行天线切换后的天线状态分别在band C与band D,其中一根上行天线从band A切换至band C所需的切换间隙为N1,另一根上行天线从band B切换至band D所需的切换间隙为N2,N1大于N2,此时若基站假设终端按照N2进行上行天线切换,则会出现基站已经开始调度终端band A与band C上的上行业务,但是终端的上行天线还未从band A切换至band C上。For example, the initial states of the two uplink antennas are band A and band B, and the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are band C and band D respectively. The switching gap required for one uplink antenna to switch from band A to band C is N1, and the switching gap required for the other uplink antenna to switch from band B to band D is N2. N1 is greater than N2. At this time, if the base station assumes that the terminal switches the uplink antenna according to N2, the base station will start scheduling the uplink services on band A and band C of the terminal, but the uplink antenna of the terminal has not yet switched from band A to band C.
因此,本公开会在终端存在多个切换间隙时,假设终端按照最大切换间隙进行切换。Therefore, the present disclosure assumes that the terminal performs switching according to the maximum switching gap when the terminal has multiple switching gaps.
示例地,两根上行天线的初始状态在band A与band B,两根上行天线切换后的天线状态分别在band C与band D,其中一根上行天线从band A切换至band C所需的切换间隙为N1,另一根上行天线从band B切换至band D所需的切换间隙为N2,N1大于N2,此时基站会假设终端按照N1进行上行天线切换,经过切换间隙N1之后,band A已经切换至band C,band B也切换至band D,如此,则可以保证在上行天线还从band A切换至band C上之后,基站才会调度band A与band C上的上行业务。For example, the initial states of the two uplink antennas are band A and band B, and the antenna states of the two uplink antennas after switching are band C and band D respectively. The switching gap required for one uplink antenna to switch from band A to band C is N1, and the switching gap required for the other uplink antenna to switch from band B to band D is N2. N1 is greater than N2. At this time, the base station will assume that the terminal switches the uplink antenna according to N1. After the switching gap N1, band A has switched to band C, and band B has also switched to band D. In this way, it can be guaranteed that the base station will schedule the uplink services on band A and band C only after the uplink antenna is switched from band A to band C.
通过上述技术方案,在网络设备存在多个切换间隙时,确定所述网络设备按照最大切换间隙进行切换。可以保证基站在上行天线在不同的频带上切换完毕之后,才会调度被释放的频带。Through the above technical solution, when a network device has multiple switching gaps, it is determined that the network device is switched according to the maximum switching gap, which can ensure that the base station will schedule the released frequency band only after the uplink antenna has completed switching on different frequency bands.
图34是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种确定上行天线切换模式的装置,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340包括:FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode according to an exemplary embodiment. The device 340 for determining an uplink antenna switching mode includes:
接收模块341,用于接收网络设备发送的下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息用于调度进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务;A receiving module 341, configured to receive downlink control information sent by a network device, wherein the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching;
处理模块342,用于根据所述多个上行业务和/或所述下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式。The processing module 342 is used to determine an uplink antenna switching mode according to the multiple uplink services and/or the downlink control information.
可选地,所述上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式,所述第一切换模式为:Optionally, the uplink antenna switching mode is a first switching mode, and the first switching mode is:
所述用户设备执行一次上行天线切换,和/或所述用户设备基于一个切换间隙执行上行天线切换。The user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch, and/or the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch based on a switching gap.
可选地,所述上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式,所述第二切换模式为:Optionally, the uplink antenna switching mode is a second switching mode, and the second switching mode is:
所述用户设备执行多次上行天线切换,和/或所述用户设备基于多个切换间隙执行上行天线切换。The user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, and/or the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为确定下行控制信息与所述多个上行业务位于不同频带;A processing module, configured to determine that the downlink control information and the plurality of uplink services are located in different frequency bands;
处理模块,被配置为确定所述多个上行业务需要进行上行天线切换。The processing module is configured to determine that the multiple uplink services require uplink antenna switching.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为确定所述多个上行业务同时开始;A processing module, configured to determine that the multiple uplink services start simultaneously;
处理模块,被配置为确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。The processing module is configured to determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
可选地,所述多个上行业务同时开始包括以下至少一种:Optionally, the multiple uplink services are started simultaneously including at least one of the following:
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐;Aligning first symbols of channels carrying the multiple uplink services;
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值。The number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠。The processing module is configured so that the subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located are different, and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain.
可选地,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:Optionally, the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing;
子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing;
子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;
The left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing;
子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。The right edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
可选地,所述承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐,包括:Optionally, the first symbol alignment of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services includes:
承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠。A first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
可选地,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:Optionally, the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;
承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为根据参考频带,确定承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量,所述参考频带包括多个频带中最大子载波间隔的频带或者最小子载波间隔的频带。The processing module is configured to determine the number of symbols spaced between the first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services according to a reference frequency band, wherein the reference frequency band includes a frequency band with a maximum subcarrier spacing or a frequency band with a minimum subcarrier spacing among multiple frequency bands.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为确定所述多个上行业务不同时开始;A processing module, configured to determine that the multiple uplink services do not start at the same time;
处理模块,被配置为确定所述多个上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。The processing module is configured to determine that the mode of switching the multiple uplink antennas is the second switching mode.
可选地,所述多个上行业务不同时开始包括以下至少一种:Optionally, the multiple uplink services not starting at the same time include at least one of the following:
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐;The first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned;
承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量大于预定数值。The number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为确定多个下行控制信息对齐;A processing module, configured to determine the alignment of multiple downlink control information;
处理模块,被配置为确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。The processing module is configured to determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
可选地,所述多个下行控制信息对齐,包括:Optionally, the alignment of the multiple downlink control information includes:
两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上重叠;所述第一符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two downlink control information are located are different. The first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing. The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
可选地,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:Optionally, the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol;
所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol;
所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol;
所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘对齐。The right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上重叠;所述第三符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The processing module is configured to overlap the third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
可选地,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:Optionally, the overlapping in the time domain includes at least one of the following:
所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol;
所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol;
所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol;
所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘对齐。The right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为确定多个下行控制信息不对齐;A processing module configured to determine that a plurality of downlink control information are not aligned;
处理模块,被配置为确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。The processing module is configured to determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
可选地,所述多个下行控制信息不对齐,包括:Optionally, the multiple downlink control information are not aligned, including:
两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息
的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上不重叠,所述第一符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The subcarrier spacing of the two frequency bands where the downlink control information is located is different. The frequency band with a smaller subcarrier spacing carries the downlink control information. The first symbol of the channel does not overlap with the second symbol of the channel carrying downlink control information in a frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain. The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
可选地,所述多个下行控制信息不对齐,包括:Optionally, the multiple downlink control information are not aligned, including:
承载多个下行控制信息中的首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上不重叠;所述第三符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
处理模块,被配置为确定所述多个上行业务的下行控制信息为同一下行控制信息;A processing module, configured to determine that the downlink control information of the multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information;
处理模块,被配置为确定所述多个上下行业务触发的上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。The processing module is configured to determine that the mode of uplink antenna switching triggered by the multiple uplink and downlink services is the first switching mode.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
调度传输模块,被配置为在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,所述用户设备不期望所述网络设备在第一频带上进行上行传输调度,所述第一频带为不与所述上行业务所在的频带并发的频带,和/或不与所述下行控制信息所在的频带并发的频带。The scheduling transmission module is configured such that, during the process of the uplink antenna switching from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on a first frequency band, wherein the first frequency band is a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the uplink service is located, and/or a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the downlink control information is located.
可选地,确定上行天线切换模式的装置340还包括:Optionally, the device 340 for determining the uplink antenna switching mode further includes:
调度传输模块,被配置为在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,所述用户设备不期望网络设备在任何频带上进行上行传输调度,其中,所述下行控制信息所在的频带不与任何频带并发。The scheduling transmission module is configured such that during the process of the uplink antenna switching from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band, wherein the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is not concurrent with any frequency band.
图35是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种用户设备的装置800的框图。例如,装置800可以是移动电话,计算机,数字广播终端,消息收发设备,游戏控制台,平板设备,医疗设备,健身设备,个人数字助理等。Fig. 35 is a block diagram of a user equipment device 800 according to an exemplary embodiment. For example, the device 800 may be a mobile phone, a computer, a digital broadcast terminal, a messaging device, a game console, a tablet device, a medical device, a fitness device, a personal digital assistant, etc.
参照图35,装置800可以包括以下一个或多个组件:处理组件802,存储器804,电源组件806,多媒体组件808,音频组件810,输入/输出接口812,传感器组件814,以及通信组件816。35 , the device 800 may include one or more of the following components: a processing component 802 , a memory 804 , a power component 806 , a multimedia component 808 , an audio component 810 , an input/output interface 812 , a sensor component 814 , and a communication component 816 .
处理组件802通常控制装置800的整体操作,诸如与显示,电话呼叫,数据通信,相机操作和记录操作相关联的操作。处理组件802可以包括一个或多个处理器820来执行指令,以完成上述的方法的全部或部分步骤。此外,处理组件802可以包括一个或多个模块,便于处理组件802和其他组件之间的交互。例如,处理组件802可以包括多媒体模块,以方便多媒体组件808和处理组件802之间的交互。The processing component 802 generally controls the overall operation of the device 800, such as operations associated with display, phone calls, data communications, camera operations, and recording operations. The processing component 802 may include one or more processors 820 to execute instructions to complete all or part of the steps of the above-mentioned method. In addition, the processing component 802 may include one or more modules to facilitate the interaction between the processing component 802 and other components. For example, the processing component 802 may include a multimedia module to facilitate the interaction between the multimedia component 808 and the processing component 802.
存储器804被配置为存储各种类型的数据以支持在装置800的操作。这些数据的示例包括用于在装置800上操作的任何应用程序或方法的指令,联系人数据,电话簿数据,消息,图片,视频等。存储器804可以由任何类型的易失性或非易失性存储设备或者它们的组合实现,如静态随机存取存储器(SRAM),电可擦除可编程只读存储器(EEPROM),可擦除可编程只读存储器(EPROM),可编程只读存储器(PROM),只读存储器(ROM),磁存储器,快闪存储器,磁盘或光盘。The memory 804 is configured to store various types of data to support operations on the device 800. Examples of such data include instructions for any application or method operating on the device 800, contact data, phone book data, messages, pictures, videos, etc. The memory 804 can be implemented by any type of volatile or non-volatile storage device or a combination thereof, such as static random access memory (SRAM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), read-only memory (ROM), magnetic memory, flash memory, magnetic disk or optical disk.
电源组件806为装置800的各种组件提供电力。电源组件806可以包括电源管理系统,一个或多个电源,及其他与为装置800生成、管理和分配电力相关联的组件。The power supply component 806 provides power to the various components of the device 800. The power supply component 806 may include a power management system, one or more power supplies, and other components associated with generating, managing, and distributing power for the device 800.
多媒体组件808包括在所述装置800和用户之间的提供一个输出接口的屏幕。在一些实施例中,屏幕可以包括液晶显示器(LCD)和触摸面板(TP)。如果屏幕包括触摸面板,屏幕可以被实现为触摸屏,以接收来自用户的输入信号。触摸面板包括一个或多个触摸传感器以感测触摸、滑动和触摸面板上的手势。所述触摸传感器可以不仅感测触摸或滑动动作的边界,而且还检测与所述触摸或滑动操作相关的持续时间和压力。在一些实施例中,多媒体组件808包括一个前置摄像头和/或后置摄像头。当装置800处于操作模式,如拍摄模式或视频模式时,前置摄像头和/或后置摄像头可以接收外部的多媒体数据。每个前置摄像头和后置摄像头可以是一个固定的光学透镜系统或具有焦距和光学变焦能力。The multimedia component 808 includes a screen that provides an output interface between the device 800 and the user. In some embodiments, the screen may include a liquid crystal display (LCD) and a touch panel (TP). If the screen includes a touch panel, the screen may be implemented as a touch screen to receive input signals from the user. The touch panel includes one or more touch sensors to sense touch, slide, and gestures on the touch panel. The touch sensor may not only sense the boundaries of the touch or slide action, but also detect the duration and pressure associated with the touch or slide operation. In some embodiments, the multimedia component 808 includes a front camera and/or a rear camera. When the device 800 is in an operating mode, such as a shooting mode or a video mode, the front camera and/or the rear camera may receive external multimedia data. Each front camera and rear camera may be a fixed optical lens system or have a focal length and optical zoom capability.
音频组件810被配置为输出和/或输入音频信号。例如,音频组件810包括一个麦克风(MIC),当装置800处于操作模式,如呼叫模式、记录模式和语音识别模式时,麦克风被配置为接收外部音频信号。所接收的音频信号可以被进一步存储在存储器804或经由通信组件816发送。在一些实施例中,音频组件810还包括一个扬声器,用于输出音频信号。The audio component 810 is configured to output and/or input audio signals. For example, the audio component 810 includes a microphone (MIC), and when the device 800 is in an operating mode, such as a call mode, a recording mode, and a speech recognition mode, the microphone is configured to receive an external audio signal. The received audio signal can be further stored in the memory 804 or sent via the communication component 816. In some embodiments, the audio component 810 also includes a speaker for outputting audio signals.
输入/输出接口812为处理组件802和外围接口模块之间提供接口,上述外围接口模块可以
是键盘,点击轮,按钮等。这些按钮可包括但不限于:主页按钮、音量按钮、启动按钮和锁定按钮。The input/output interface 812 provides an interface between the processing component 802 and the peripheral interface module. Be it a keyboard, a click wheel, buttons, etc. These buttons may include, but are not limited to: a home button, a volume button, a start button, and a lock button.
传感器组件814包括一个或多个传感器,用于为装置800提供各个方面的状态评估。例如,传感器组件814可以检测到装置800的打开/关闭状态,组件的相对定位,例如所述组件为装置800的显示器和小键盘,传感器组件814还可以检测装置800或装置800一个组件的位置改变,用户与装置800接触的存在或不存在,装置800方位或加速/减速和装置800的温度变化。传感器组件814可以包括接近传感器,被配置用来在没有任何的物理接触时检测附近物体的存在。传感器组件814还可以包括光传感器,如CMOS或CCD图像传感器,用于在成像应用中使用。在一些实施例中,该传感器组件814还可以包括加速度传感器,陀螺仪传感器,磁传感器,压力传感器或温度传感器。The sensor assembly 814 includes one or more sensors for providing various aspects of the status assessment of the device 800. For example, the sensor assembly 814 can detect the open/closed state of the device 800, the relative positioning of components, such as the display and keypad of the device 800, and the sensor assembly 814 can also detect the position change of the device 800 or a component of the device 800, the presence or absence of user contact with the device 800, the orientation or acceleration/deceleration of the device 800, and the temperature change of the device 800. The sensor assembly 814 may include a proximity sensor configured to detect the presence of a nearby object without any physical contact. The sensor assembly 814 may also include an optical sensor, such as a CMOS or CCD image sensor, for use in imaging applications. In some embodiments, the sensor assembly 814 may also include an accelerometer, a gyroscope sensor, a magnetic sensor, a pressure sensor, or a temperature sensor.
通信组件816被配置为便于装置800和其他设备之间有线或无线方式的通信。装置800可以接入基于通信标准的无线网络,如WiFi,2G或3G,或它们的组合。在一个示例性实施例中,通信组件816经由广播信道接收来自外部广播管理系统的广播信号或广播相关信息。在一个示例性实施例中,所述通信组件816还包括近场通信(NFC)模块,以促进短程通信。例如,在NFC模块可基于射频识别(RFID)技术,红外数据协会(IrDA)技术,超宽带(UWB)技术,蓝牙(BT)技术和其他技术来实现。The communication component 816 is configured to facilitate wired or wireless communication between the device 800 and other devices. The device 800 can access a wireless network based on a communication standard, such as WiFi, 2G or 3G, or a combination thereof. In an exemplary embodiment, the communication component 816 receives a broadcast signal or broadcast-related information from an external broadcast management system via a broadcast channel. In an exemplary embodiment, the communication component 816 also includes a near field communication (NFC) module to facilitate short-range communication. For example, the NFC module can be implemented based on radio frequency identification (RFID) technology, infrared data association (IrDA) technology, ultra-wideband (UWB) technology, Bluetooth (BT) technology and other technologies.
在示例性实施例中,装置800可以被一个或多个应用专用集成电路(ASIC)、数字信号处理器(DSP)、数字信号处理设备(DSPD)、可编程逻辑器件(PLD)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)、控制器、微控制器、微处理器或其他电子元件实现,用于执行上述方法。In an exemplary embodiment, the apparatus 800 may be implemented by one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors (DSPs), digital signal processing devices (DSPDs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors or other electronic components to perform the above method.
在示例性实施例中,还提供了一种包括指令的非临时性计算机可读存储介质,例如包括指令的存储器804,上述指令可由装置800的处理器820执行以完成上述方法。例如,所述非临时性计算机可读存储介质可以是ROM、随机存取存储器(RAM)、CD-ROM、磁带、软盘和光数据存储设备等。In an exemplary embodiment, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium including instructions is also provided, such as a memory 804 including instructions, and the instructions can be executed by the processor 820 of the device 800 to perform the above method. For example, the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium can be a ROM, a random access memory (RAM), a CD-ROM, a magnetic tape, a floppy disk, an optical data storage device, etc.
上述装置除了可以是独立的电子设备外,也可是独立电子设备的一部分,例如在一种实施例中,该装置可以是集成电路(Integrated Circuit,IC)或芯片,其中该集成电路可以是一个IC,也可以是多个IC的集合;该芯片可以包括但不限于以下种类:GPU(Graphics Processing Unit,图形处理器)、CPU(Central Processing Unit,中央处理器)、FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Array,可编程逻辑阵列)、DSP(Digital Signal Processor,数字信号处理器)、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,专用集成电路)、SOC(System on Chip,SoC,片上系统或系统级芯片)等。上述的集成电路或芯片中可以用于执行可执行指令(或代码),以实现上述的确定上行天线切换模式的方法。其中该可执行指令可以存储在该集成电路或芯片中,也可以从其他的装置或设备获取,例如该集成电路或芯片中包括处理器、存储器,以及用于与其他的装置通信的接口。该可执行指令可以存储于该存储器中,当该可执行指令被处理器执行时实现上述的确定上行天线切换模式的方法;或者,该集成电路或芯片可以通过该接口接收可执行指令并传输给该处理器执行,以实现上述的确定上行天线切换模式的方法。In addition to being an independent electronic device, the above-mentioned device can also be a part of an independent electronic device. For example, in one embodiment, the device can be an integrated circuit (IC) or a chip, wherein the integrated circuit can be an IC or a collection of multiple ICs; the chip can include but is not limited to the following types: GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), CPU (Central Processing Unit), FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array), DSP (Digital Signal Processor), ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), SOC (System on Chip, SoC), etc. The above-mentioned integrated circuit or chip can be used to execute executable instructions (or codes) to implement the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode. The executable instructions can be stored in the integrated circuit or chip, or can be obtained from other devices or equipment, for example, the integrated circuit or chip includes a processor, a memory, and an interface for communicating with other devices. The executable instruction can be stored in the memory, and when the executable instruction is executed by the processor, the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode is implemented; alternatively, the integrated circuit or chip can receive the executable instruction through the interface and transmit it to the processor for execution, so as to implement the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode.
在另一示例性实施例中,还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包含能够由可编程的装置执行的计算机程序,该计算机程序具有当由该可编程的装置执行时用于执行上述的确定上行天线切换模式的方法的代码部分。In another exemplary embodiment, a computer program product is further provided. The computer program product includes a computer program executable by a programmable device, and the computer program has a code portion for executing the above method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode when executed by the programmable device.
图36是根据一示例性实施例示出的一种网络设备1900的框图。例如,装置1900可以被提供为一基站。参照图36,基站1900包括处理组件1922,其进一步包括一个或多个处理器,以及由存储器1932所代表的存储器资源,用于存储可由处理组件1922的执行的指令,例如应用程序。存储器1932中存储的应用程序可以包括一个或一个以上的每一个对应于一组指令的模块。此外,处理组件1922被配置为执行指令,以执行上述确定上行天线切换模式的方法。FIG36 is a block diagram of a network device 1900 according to an exemplary embodiment. For example, the device 1900 may be provided as a base station. Referring to FIG36 , the base station 1900 includes a processing component 1922, which further includes one or more processors, and a memory resource represented by a memory 1932 for storing instructions executable by the processing component 1922, such as an application. The application stored in the memory 1932 may include one or more modules, each corresponding to a set of instructions. In addition, the processing component 1922 is configured to execute instructions to perform the above-mentioned method for determining the uplink antenna switching mode.
装置1900还可以包括一个电源组件1926被配置为执行装置1900的电源管理,一个有线或无线网络接口1950被配置为将装置1900连接到网络,和一个输入/输出接口1958。The device 1900 may also include a power component 1926 configured to perform power management of the device 1900 , a wired or wireless network interface 1950 configured to connect the device 1900 to a network, and an input/output interface 1958 .
本领域技术人员在考虑说明书及实践本公开后,将容易想到本公开的其它实施方案。本申请旨在涵盖本公开的任何变型、用途或者适应性变化,这些变型、用途或者适应性变化遵循本公开的一般性原理并包括本公开未公开的本技术领域中的公知常识或惯用技术手段。说明书和实施例仅被视为示例性的,本公开的真正范围和精神由下面的权利要求指出。Those skilled in the art will readily appreciate other embodiments of the present disclosure after considering the specification and practicing the present disclosure. This application is intended to cover any variations, uses, or adaptations of the present disclosure that follow the general principles of the present disclosure and include common knowledge or customary techniques in the art that are not disclosed in the present disclosure. The specification and examples are intended to be exemplary only, and the true scope and spirit of the present disclosure are indicated by the following claims.
应当理解的是,本公开并不局限于上面已经描述并在附图中示出的精确结构,并且可以在
不脱离其范围进行各种修改和改变。本公开的范围仅由所附的权利要求来限制。
It should be understood that the present disclosure is not limited to the precise structures described above and shown in the accompanying drawings and may be Various modifications and changes may be made without departing from the scope thereof.The scope of the present disclosure is limited only by the appended claims.
Claims (27)
- 一种确定上行天线切换模式的方法,其特征在于,所述方法由用户设备执行,包括:A method for determining an uplink antenna switching mode, characterized in that the method is performed by a user equipment and includes:接收网络设备发送的至少一个下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息用于调度进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务;receiving at least one downlink control information sent by a network device, where the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching;根据所述多个上行业务和/或下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式。The uplink antenna switching mode is determined according to the multiple uplink services and/or downlink control information.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行天线切换的模式为第一切换模式,所述第一切换模式为:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the uplink antenna switching mode is a first switching mode, and the first switching mode is:所述用户设备执行一次上行天线切换,和/或所述用户设备基于一个切换间隙执行上行天线切换。The user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch, and/or the user equipment performs an uplink antenna switch based on a switching gap.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行天线切换的模式为第二切换模式,所述第二切换模式为:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the uplink antenna switching mode is a second switching mode, and the second switching mode is:所述用户设备执行多次上行天线切换,和/或所述用户设备基于多个切换间隙执行上行天线切换。The user equipment performs multiple uplink antenna switching, and/or the user equipment performs uplink antenna switching based on multiple switching gaps.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the method further comprises:确定所述下行控制信息与所述多个上行业务位于不同频带;Determining that the downlink control information and the multiple uplink services are located in different frequency bands;确定所述多个上行业务需要进行上行天线切换。It is determined that the multiple uplink services require uplink antenna switching.
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the method further comprises:确定所述多个上行业务同时开始;Determining that the multiple uplink services start simultaneously;确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。Determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个上行业务同时开始包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 5, wherein the multiple uplink services are started simultaneously and include at least one of the following:承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐;Aligning first symbols of channels carrying the multiple uplink services;承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量小于或等于预定数值。The number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is less than or equal to a predetermined value.
- 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6, characterized in that the method further comprises:两个上行业务所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠。The subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two uplink services are located are different, and the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps with the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing in the time domain.
- 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 7, characterized in that the overlapping in the time domain comprises at least one of the following:子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing;子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing;子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel on the frequency band with large subcarrier spacing;子载波间隔小的频带上的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与子载波间隔大的频带上的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。The right edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing.
- 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号对齐,包括:The method according to claim 6, characterized in that the first symbol alignment of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services comprises:承载所述多个上行业务中首个上行业务的信道的首个符号,与承载最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号在时域上重叠。A first symbol of a channel carrying a first uplink service among the multiple uplink services overlaps with a first symbol of a channel carrying a last uplink service in the time domain.
- 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 9, characterized in that the overlapping in the time domain comprises at least one of the following:承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service;承载所述首个上行业务的信道的首个符号右侧边缘,与承载所述最后一个上行业务的信道的首个符号左侧边缘对齐。 The right edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the first uplink service is aligned with the left edge of the first symbol of the channel carrying the last uplink service.
- 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6, characterized in that the method further comprises:根据参考频带,确定承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量,所述参考频带包括多个频带中最大子载波间隔的频带或者最小子载波间隔的频带。The number of symbols spaced between first symbols of channels carrying the multiple uplink services is determined according to a reference frequency band, wherein the reference frequency band includes a frequency band with a maximum subcarrier spacing or a frequency band with a minimum subcarrier spacing among multiple frequency bands.
- 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the method further comprises:确定所述多个上行业务不同时开始;Determining that the multiple uplink services do not start at the same time;确定所述多个上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。Determine that a mode of switching the multiple uplink antennas is the second switching mode.
- 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个上行业务不同时开始包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 12, wherein the multiple uplink services are not started at the same time and include at least one of the following:承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号不对齐;The first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services are not aligned;承载所述多个上行业务的信道的首个符号之间间隔的符号数量大于预定数值。The number of symbols spaced between first symbols of the channels carrying the multiple uplink services is greater than a predetermined value.
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the method further comprises:确定多个下行控制信息对齐;Determining alignment of multiple downlink control information;确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。Determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个下行控制信息对齐,包括:The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the alignment of the multiple downlink control information comprises:两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上重叠;所述第一符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The subcarrier spacings of the frequency bands where the two downlink control information are located are different. The first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing overlaps in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information on the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing. The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 15, characterized in that the overlapping in the time domain comprises at least one of the following:所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol;所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol;所述第一符号左侧边缘与所述第二符号右侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the first symbol is aligned with the right edge of the second symbol;所述第一符号右侧边缘与所述第二符号左侧边缘对齐。The right edge of the first symbol is aligned with the left edge of the second symbol.
- 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the method further comprises:承载多个下行控制信息中首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上重叠;所述第三符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information overlaps with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述在时域上重叠包括以下至少一种:The method according to claim 17, characterized in that the overlapping in the time domain comprises at least one of the following:所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol;所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘对齐;The right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol;所述第三符号左侧边缘与所述第四时域符号右侧边缘对齐;The left edge of the third symbol is aligned with the right edge of the fourth time domain symbol;所述第三符号右侧边缘与所述第四时域符号左侧边缘对齐。The right edge of the third symbol is aligned with the left edge of the fourth time domain symbol.
- 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the method further comprises:确定多个下行控制信息不对齐;Determining that a plurality of downlink control information are not aligned;确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第二切换模式。Determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the second switching mode.
- 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个下行控制信息不对齐,包括:The method according to claim 19, wherein the plurality of downlink control information are not aligned, comprising:两个下行控制信息所在频带的子载波间隔不同,子载波间隔小的频带上承载下行控制信息的信道的第一符号,与子载波间隔大的频带承载下行控制信息的信道的第二符号在时域上不重叠,所述第一符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第二符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The subcarrier spacings of the two frequency bands where downlink control information are located are different. The first symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information in the frequency band with a small subcarrier spacing does not overlap in the time domain with the second symbol of the channel carrying the downlink control information in the frequency band with a large subcarrier spacing. The first symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the second symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个下行控制信息不对齐,包括:The method according to claim 19, wherein the plurality of downlink control information are not aligned, comprising:承载多个下行控制信息中的首个下行控制信息的信道的第三符号,与承载最后一个下行控制信息的信道的第四符号在时域上不重叠;所述第三符号为首个符号或最后一个符号,所述第四符号为首个符号或最后一个符号。The third symbol of the channel carrying the first downlink control information among multiple downlink control information does not overlap with the fourth symbol of the channel carrying the last downlink control information in the time domain; the third symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol, and the fourth symbol is the first symbol or the last symbol.
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the method further comprises:确定调度所述多个上行业务的下行控制信息为同一下行控制信息;Determining that the downlink control information for scheduling the multiple uplink services is the same downlink control information;确定所述上行天线切换的模式为所述第一切换模式。Determine that the uplink antenna switching mode is the first switching mode.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the method further comprises:在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,所述用户设备不期望所述网络设备在第一频带上进行上行传输调度,所述第一频带为不与所述上行业务所在的频带并发的频带,和/或不与所述下行控制信息所在的频带并发的频带。During the process of switching the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on the first frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the uplink service is located, and/or a frequency band that is not concurrent with the frequency band where the downlink control information is located.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括: The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the method further comprises:在上行天线从所述下行控制信息所在的频带切换至所述上行业务所在的频带的过程中,所述用户设备不期望网络设备在任何频带上进行上行传输调度,其中,所述下行控制信息所在的频带不与任何频带并发。During the process of switching the uplink antenna from the frequency band where the downlink control information is located to the frequency band where the uplink service is located, the user equipment does not expect the network equipment to perform uplink transmission scheduling on any frequency band, wherein the frequency band where the downlink control information is located is not concurrent with any frequency band.
- 一种确定上行天线切换模式的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining an uplink antenna switching mode, characterized by comprising:接收模块,用于接收网络设备发送的下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息用于调度进行上行天线切换的多个上行业务;A receiving module, used to receive downlink control information sent by a network device, wherein the downlink control information is used to schedule multiple uplink services for uplink antenna switching;处理模块,用于根据所述多个上行业务和/或所述下行控制信息,确定上行天线切换的模式。The processing module is used to determine the uplink antenna switching mode according to the multiple uplink services and/or the downlink control information.
- 一种用户设备,其特征在于,包括:A user equipment, comprising:处理器;processor;用于存储处理器可执行指令的存储器;a memory for storing processor-executable instructions;其中,所述处理器被配置为在执行所述可执行指令时,实现权利要求1~24中任一项所述方法的步骤。Wherein, the processor is configured to implement the steps of the method described in any one of claims 1 to 24 when executing the executable instructions.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序指令,其特征在于,该程序指令被处理器执行时实现权利要求1~24中任一项所述方法的步骤。 A computer-readable storage medium having computer program instructions stored thereon, characterized in that when the program instructions are executed by a processor, the steps of the method described in any one of claims 1 to 24 are implemented.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/072998 WO2024152274A1 (en) | 2023-01-18 | 2023-01-18 | Method and apparatus for determining uplink antenna switching mode, and storage medium |
CN202380008097.8A CN118679834A (en) | 2023-01-18 | 2023-01-18 | Method, device and storage medium for determining uplink antenna switching mode |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/072998 WO2024152274A1 (en) | 2023-01-18 | 2023-01-18 | Method and apparatus for determining uplink antenna switching mode, and storage medium |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2024152274A1 true WO2024152274A1 (en) | 2024-07-25 |
Family
ID=91955046
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/072998 WO2024152274A1 (en) | 2023-01-18 | 2023-01-18 | Method and apparatus for determining uplink antenna switching mode, and storage medium |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN118679834A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2024152274A1 (en) |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN103460619A (en) * | 2011-02-22 | 2013-12-18 | 高通股份有限公司 | Uplink transmit antenna selection in carrier aggregation |
WO2020166086A1 (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-20 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | User terminal and wireless communication method |
CN113747586A (en) * | 2021-09-28 | 2021-12-03 | 京信网络系统股份有限公司 | Resource allocation method, device, system, computer equipment and storage medium |
CN114586450A (en) * | 2022-01-20 | 2022-06-03 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Method, device, communication equipment and storage medium for switching BWP |
-
2023
- 2023-01-18 CN CN202380008097.8A patent/CN118679834A/en active Pending
- 2023-01-18 WO PCT/CN2023/072998 patent/WO2024152274A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN103460619A (en) * | 2011-02-22 | 2013-12-18 | 高通股份有限公司 | Uplink transmit antenna selection in carrier aggregation |
WO2020166086A1 (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-20 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | User terminal and wireless communication method |
CN113747586A (en) * | 2021-09-28 | 2021-12-03 | 京信网络系统股份有限公司 | Resource allocation method, device, system, computer equipment and storage medium |
CN114586450A (en) * | 2022-01-20 | 2022-06-03 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Method, device, communication equipment and storage medium for switching BWP |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN118679834A (en) | 2024-09-20 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2020132885A1 (en) | Data transmission method, base station, user equipment and storage medium | |
RU2771189C1 (en) | Time domain resource assignment method, data transfer method, base station and terminal | |
US20230081293A1 (en) | Data transmission method and data transmission apparatus | |
US12021629B2 (en) | Hybrid automatic repeat request feedback method and device | |
JP7507228B2 (en) | Resource allocation method, device and storage medium | |
KR20220093358A (en) | Beam failure detection resource allocation method, apparatus and storage medium | |
WO2018218491A1 (en) | Data transmission method and device | |
US11503642B2 (en) | Method and device for determining an uplink-downlink switching point | |
EP4002943B1 (en) | Data transmission method, apparatus, and storage medium | |
US11665719B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting data | |
EP3952506B1 (en) | Slot format indication method and apparatus | |
US20210314992A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for sending uplink scheduling request, device and storage medium | |
WO2023206551A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting sidelink data, and readable storage medium | |
US11924121B2 (en) | Data transmission method and apparatus, and storage medium | |
US11895686B2 (en) | Method, device and medium for transmitting information | |
EP3836433A1 (en) | Monitoring method and apparatus, device, and storage medium | |
US11418290B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting data | |
US12028172B2 (en) | Method and device for scheduling hybrid automatic repeat request | |
WO2024082186A1 (en) | Switching delay determination method and apparatus, device, storage medium, and chip | |
WO2024152274A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for determining uplink antenna switching mode, and storage medium | |
US20250031190A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for triggering srs, and storage medium | |
US20230412332A1 (en) | Data transmission method and storage medium | |
US12063630B2 (en) | Method and device for indicating resource occupation state, and method and device for determining resource occupation state | |
US20240349350A1 (en) | Random access method and apparatus, and storage medium | |
US20250071739A1 (en) | Communication method and device for pucch |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 202380008097.8 Country of ref document: CN |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23916757 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |